Dxdesigner User

DxDesigner Users Guide
For PADS Flow Software Version PADS 9.3
2005-2011 Mentor Graphics Corporation All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made. The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND 03/97 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The SOFTWARE and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are commercial computer software provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement provided with the software pursuant to DFARS 227.72023(a) or as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor/manufacturer is: Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777. Telephone: 503.685.7000 Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210 Website: www.mentor.com SupportNet: www.mentor.com/supportnet Send Feedback on Documentation: www.mentor.com/supportnet/documentation/reply_form.cfm
TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of Mentor Graphics Corporation or other third parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Mentor Graphics or the respective third-party owner. The use herein of a thirdparty Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/terms_conditions/trademarks.cfm.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction to DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Netlist Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing DxDesigner Key Bindings and Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing in a Multi-User Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toggling the Project Navigator On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding the Navigator Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating Objects from the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing Project Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Libraries to a Project (Netlist workflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up and Restoring a Sheet or ICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching a Boards Root Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Root Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Block from the Project Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-ordering Sheets in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 17 20 24 25 25 29 30 30 31 31 34 43 43 52 54 55 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 68
DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3
Table of Contents
Adding a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Local Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Local Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 Building a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Schematic Sheets with Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partitioning a Sheet into Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Annotations for Link Symbols on a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Symbols to a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Symbols from Distributed Libraries (Netlist Workflow). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Placed Components to Match Changed Distributed Library Symbols . . . . . . . . Creating Component Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Special Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Components in a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Net and Bus Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Components with Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Nets to Power/Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Components With Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Components with Differential Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Graphics to a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Graphical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text to a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Your Completed Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Working Within the Schematic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening an Existing Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Schematic Sheet to Another Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Between Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking and Embedding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Embedding New Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Embedding an Existing Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69 69 70 71 72 72 73 75 76 76 77 85 91 94 95 96 96 97 98 99 99 102 107 109 110 124 126 132 132 133 133 134 134 138 139 141 141 142 142 143 145 145 146 147
Table of Contents
Linking Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Selected Symbols/Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding and Replacing Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Names and Properties as Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Showing Connections to Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Commands Using Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning and Zooming Within Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning and Zooming Expedition-Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning and Zooming DxDesigner-Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning and Zooming PADS-Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Net or Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Nets and Net Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Objects Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deselecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Which Objects to Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Selected Schematic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Selected Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflecting (Flip-Mirror) a Selected Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating a Selected Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling a Selected Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Size of Selected Text, Properties, or Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching a Selected Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying - Cutting - Moving - Selected Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding and Changing the Name of a Selected Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an ICT Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an ICT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Components to an ICT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Connectivity to Components in an ICT Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting ICT Color Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping and Ungrouping ICT Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting ICT Row and Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding and Showing ICT Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitting and Recombining an ICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147 148 148 149 149 150 151 152 152 153 153 154 156 159 163 164 164 165 166 166 167 169 171 172 172 176 180 180 181 181 181 184 185 191 191 192 193 194 195 203 206 207 207 208 208 209
Table of Contents
Printing an ICT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Interconnectivity Table Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Chapter 6 Building Hierarchical Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hierarchical Design Methodologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hierarchical Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Bottom-up Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating a Block from a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Nets and Pins to a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Within Hierarchical Designs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Block in an Open Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Local Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagating Properties Hierarchically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Hierarchical Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagating Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagation Control Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Property Propagation Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7 Specifying the Characteristics of Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding and Editing Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Test Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning and Editing Constraints with the Constraints Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8 Checking the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating DRC Defaults Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the DRC for the Current Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 9 Simulating Designs in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulation Requirements in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an HDL Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an HDL Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compiling HDL Source Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
213 214 215 216 216 217 219 219 220 221 224 224 225 227 228 228 229 230 231 232 233 233 240 241 242 247 247 248 252 253 253 255 257 257 259 259 261 262
Table of Contents
HDL Testbenches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulating a Simple Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulating a Small PCB Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Netlisting from DxDesigner for Digital Simulation in ModelSim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting VHDL, SPICE, and Verilog Files onto a Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a File over an Existing Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulating Signal Integrity with HyperLynx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269 272 272 276 283 283 284 284 285 286
Chapter 10 Exchanging Data with Layout Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Packaging A Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Exchanging Data Within Netlist Workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Chapter 11 Archiving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Running DxArchiver from a Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Chapter 12 Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating a PDF of Your Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Basic Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Design to Metafile Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spooling the Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 13 Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying PADS Decal Pin Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Assigning PADS Decals from DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing PADS Decals from DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning PADS Decals to DxDesigner Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Component Pin Numbers Against PADS Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 14 Generating Bills of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Part Lister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 15 295 295 296 297 297 298 298
301 301 302 302 303 304 307 307 308 309 310
Table of Contents
Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Dashboard Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Items to a Toolbox or Modifying the Properties for an Existing Tool . . . . . . . . . Deleting Items From a Dashboard Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a New Shortcut Group to the Shortcut Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming or Removing a Shortcut Group from the Shortcut Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A Troubleshooting Your Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Dashboards DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting DxDesigner Environment Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Your License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Utilities Available From Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Files in your PATH or WDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Third-Party Information End-User License Agreement
311 311 312 312 313 314 315 315 316 316 319 319 320 321 322 323
List of Figures
Figure 1-1. Grouping Properties Window with Navigator Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2. Multiple Users Accessing Same DxDesigner Schematic Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1. DxDesigner Navigator Primary Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2. DxDesigner Project Navigator Hierarchy Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3. Project Navigator - Example of Internal Cross-Probe Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4. Quick Connection View Cross-Probing Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5. Quick Connection View Netlist Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1. Specifying Which borders.ini File to Use for Border Configurations . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2. Changing a Border Configuration for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3. Changing Border Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4. Sheet Boundary and Zone with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5. Setting Zone Partitions for a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6. Horizontal (Top/Bottom) - Vertical (Left/Right) Sheet Border Offset. . . . . . . . Figure 3-7. Horizontal and Vertical Zone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8. Array Component Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9. Ripper Symbols Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10. Using the Mouse Wheel to Change Ripped Net Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11. Example - Changing/Updating Net Name Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12. Example - Update Other Objects for Bus Signals/Rippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13. Net Short Dialog Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14. Split Net Dialog Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1. Moving Between Multiple Sheets in a Flat Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2. Moving Between Multiple Sheets in a Hierarchical Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3. Example of Component and Net Tooltip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-4. Example - Listing Connected Nets of Selected Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-5. Example of PADS-Style Zoom-In Bounding Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-6. Example of PADS-Style Zoom-Out Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-7. Aligning Selected Components on a Horizontal Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-8. Aligning Selected Components on a Vertical Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-9. Aligning Net Segments on a Horizontal Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-10. Aligning Net Segments on a Vertical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-11. Flip/Mirror Objects Separately (ON) - Before/After Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-12. Flip/Mirror Objects Separately (OFF) - Before/After Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1. Interconnectivity Table Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-2. New Block in Interconnectivity Table (ICT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1. Contrasting a Flat Design and a Hierarchical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-1. Forward To PCB Property Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-2. Part List Exclude Property Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8-1. DxDesigner Diagnostics Example Output Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-1. Waveform Viewer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
18 26 30 31 35 37 42 79 81 85 86 87 90 91 97 118 120 123 124 127 128 144 144 149 150 161 162 173 174 175 176 177 178 191 193 213 241 242 251 268
List of Figures
Figure 10-1. Netlist Workflow Dataflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
10
Chapter 1 Introduction to DxDesigner

DxDesigner Windows
For a description of many of the main windows in DxDesigner, see DxDesigner User Interface in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
DxDesigner Key Features

The following are key features of DxDesigner: Stand-alone: You can use DxDesigner as a stand-alone schematic capture tool that interfaces with other tools by importing and exporting netlists. workflow. See DxDesigner Workflows Multiple Releases: You can install multiple versions of DxDesigner, but you can only run one version at a time. Switch versions with the SDD Configurator. See Switching Between Releases or Flows in Setting your Software Environment with SDD Configurator. Concurrent Design: Through the use of a central database, multiple designers can work in parallel in different sessions of DxDesigner on a given multi-schematic project. For more information, see Designing in a Multi-User Environment.
DxDesigner Key Concepts and Tasks

The following concepts and tasks comprise the major sections of this help package: Working with DxDesigner DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Building a Schematic Working Within the Schematic Editor Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Building Hierarchical Designs Specifying the Characteristics of Components Checking the Design Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Exchanging Data with Layout Tools
11
Introduction to DxDesigner Working with DxDesigner
Archiving Projects Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF Generating Bills of Materials Dashboard Troubleshooting Your Environment
Working with DxDesigner

Use the following procedures to invoke and customize DxDesigner.
Procedures
Starting DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner
DxDesigner Workflows
The DxDesigner installation contains pre-configured templates. These templates define various workflows based on which layout tool configuration you are targeting. For example, the PADS flow installation contains with pre-defined Netlist templates. In the netlist workflow, you can import and export netlists to use DxDesigner with nonintegrated tools.
Related Topics
Netlist Workflow Note: Some DxDesigner dialog boxes and menus change depending on the flow you chose.
Related Topics
Exchanging Data with Layout Tools Introduction to DxDesigner
12
Introduction to DxDesigner Starting DxDesigner
Netlist Workflow
Use the netlist workflow when you want to import or export data between DxDesigner and a tool that is not in an workflow. Following are some key features of the Netlist workflow: Uses distributed symbol libraries. Uses the following tools: Supported in Netlist Workflow
o o o o o
Toolbar Buttons
PCB Interface (ViewPCB) (Tools menu) DxLibrary Studio (Tools menu) Property Definition Editor (Tools menu) Constraints (View > Other Windows menu) *PADS Decal Preview (View > Other Windows menu)
Note *The Decal Preview window is available in the Netlist and integrated PADS flows.
Related Topics
DxDesigner Workflows PCB Interfaces Users Guide Managing Parts Databases with DxLibraryStudio
Starting DxDesigner
You can start and exit DxDesigner in the following ways.
Procedures
Start DxDesigner with one of the following methods: Table 1-1. DxDesigner Start Methods Windows Start Menu Dashboard (Windows only) See Dashboard. Start > All Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Design Entry > DxDesigner 1. Start the Dashboard with Start > All Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Dashboard. 2. Open the Toolboxes folder. 3. Open the Board-level Design (PCB) folder. 4. Double-click DxDesigner.
13
Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface
Table 1-1. DxDesigner Start Methods Command Line (Windows) 1. Open a command shell. 2. Navigate to the following location: $SDD_HOME/common/<platform>/bin 3. Enter viewdraw.
Related Topic
Working with DxDesigner DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Customize your DxDesigner workspace by choosing which functionality (toolbar commands) you want to display or which icons appear in your session toolbars. You can also customize the window layout in a number of ways.
Procedures
Changing DxDesigner Key Bindings and Strokes Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner
Related Topic
Working with DxDesigner DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects DxDesigner User Interface in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Changing DxDesigner Key Bindings and Strokes

Key bindings are a way to execute common DxDesigner commands by using shortcut keys, which are predefined associations of commands to simple keyboard key presses. Some are executed with a single key press, and some are executed with a key combination. Also part of Key Binding definitions are Stroke definitions. Strokes are predefined patterns of mouse movements that you use to execute commands or functions. You press-and-hold the right mouse button while you draw a stroke pattern on an imaginary grid on the schematic. The grid translates the pattern into a numerical sequence and executes the command.
14
The following table shows the numerical sequences that the strokes recognize and translate into commands. Table 1-2. Numerical Sequences Grid Defining Strokes Stroke grid 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9
Prerequisites
For Stroke definitions to take effect in your DxDesigner session you must be sure that the Strokes off button is not checked in Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory).
Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types

DxDesigner uses two window types for displaying windows such as the Properties or Navigator windows: Docked windows By default, the windows stay in a specified location within the DxDesigner interface. You can remove them from view or change their display setting to a floating window. Floating windows You can display your windows as floating entities outside of the main DxDesigner interface. Another way to manage windows is to group them so that one region in your DxDesigner session can contain two or more windows, each with a tab at the bottom that allows you to select which one is visible. See Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region.
Procedures
Converting a Docked Window into a Floating Window Converting a Floating Window to a Docked Window
Related Topics
o o
Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu
15
Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface o
Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner
Converting a Docked Window into a Floating Window

Change docked windows into floating windows to move the windows out of the DxDesigner interface, saving room for the schematic capture window.
Procedure
1. In the title bar of the docked window, uncheck the Allow Docking feature by right-click > Allow Docking. 2. Click-and-hold the title bar of the window. 3. Drag the window to another location on your screen.
Related Topic
o
Converting a Floating Window to a Docked Window
Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region
Converting a Floating Window to a Docked Window

Dock windows to keep them locked in a specific place on the DxDesigner interface.
Procedure
1. In the title bar of the floating window, enable the Allow Docking feature by right-click > Allow Docking. 2. Click-and-hold the title bar of the window. 3. Drag the window anywhere on top of the DxDesigner interface. Tip: DxDesigner window placement is stored in the dxdesigner.wsp file. If you lose any undocked windows outside the bounds of your screen, delete this file. DxDesigner creates a new file that restores default window placement.
Related Topic
o
Converting a Docked Window into a Floating Window
16

Figure 1-1 shows how you can move one window (in this example, the Properties window) on top of another window (Navigator window) to make more room for other windows, in this case the Schematic window. The combined Properties/Navigator window uses tabs at the bottom to manage which window is visible at one time. You can add additional windows to this same region.
17
Figure 1-1. Grouping Properties Window with Navigator Window
Prerequisite
Before you can move a window in this manner, the target window must Allow Docking. In the previous example, the target window is the Navigator window.
18
Procedure
This example combines the Properties window on top of the Navigator window as shown in Figure 1-1. 1. Verify that the Navigator window is set to Allow Docking by right-clicking in the title bar of the Navigator window as shown below. The check-mark should appear.
2. Click-and-hold the title bar of the Properties window and drag it to the Navigator window, on top of the icon that appears as shown below on the left. When the cursor contacts the icon, the display changes as shown on the right:
3. Release the left-mouse button. The window should look similar to the bottom part of Figure 1-1, with multiple tabs appearing at the bottom of the shared region. Note To activate one of the grouped windows, click the desired tab at the bottom of the shared region.
19
Related Topics
o o o
Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner
Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu

You can customize the Tools menu to include programs that you want to launch from your DxDesigner application. Customize your Tools menu by adding, removing, or editing menu command entries. The Tools menu has three sections: System menu commands: Commands that the application places on the Tools menu. These commands appear in the top-most section of the Tools menu command list. You cannot customize or edit these commands. Common menu commands: Commands that you place on the Tools menu that are available to any user. These commands are identified with a (common) text string appended to your menu name in Tools menu command list. DxDesigner stores changes to the common menu in a file named commontools.ini that is located in the %SDD_HOME%\standard directory. These changes will be effective for all users of this machine in all projects. User menu commands: Commands that you place on the Tools menu that can run any program. These commands appear in the bottom section of the Tools menu command list. DxDesigner stores information about the user menu in a file named usertools.ini. DxDesigner maintains copies of this file in either the project directory or in the first writable directory in your WDIR path based on the whether you select the Customize this project only option.
Procedures
Adding a Command to the Tools Menu Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry Removing a Command From the Tools Menu
20
Related Topics
o o o
Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner
Customize Tools Menu Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. DxDesigner Arguments
Adding a Command to the Tools Menu

Add a command to the Tools menu as a shortcut for running the command.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Customize to display the Customize Tools Menu dialog box. 2. If you want the command available to all users who log on to your PC, select the Common option from the Menu Item Types section. 3. Enter the name that you want to appear as the new menu command in the Menu Text field. 4. You can specify a letter in the menu title as a menu accelerator by entering the title with an ampersand (&) immediately preceding the accelerator letter. If you do not specify an accelerator, the first unique letter in the title is the accelerator by default. 5. Enter the command that invokes the new application in the Command field. Click the Browse button to select the appropriate drive and directory, and then select the executable you want to add from the list of file names. 6. Enter the arguments associated with the command in the Arguments field. For information on valid arguments, refer to DxDesigner Arguments on page 23. 7. Enter the working directory for the tool in the Initial directory field. 8. Click the Add button to add the menu item to the Tools menu. 9. Click the OK button to dismiss the dialog box.
Results
The command now appears on the Tools menu. To run the program, choose it from the menu.
21
Related Topics
o o o
Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry Removing a Command From the Tools Menu DxDesigner Arguments
Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry

You can only edit the custom commands in the Tools menu. You cannot edit the built-in commands.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Customize. The Customize Tools Menu dialog box appears. 2. Select the menu option that you want to edit from the Menu Contents field. 3. When you select the option, the information associated with that option appears in the Menu Text, Command, Argument, and Initial Directory fields. 4. Edit the field that you want to change. For example, edit the command name that appears on the Tools menu by editing the text in the Menu Text field. 5. You can also change the location of the menu item in list using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. 6. Click OK.
Related Topics
o o o
Adding a Command to the Tools Menu Removing a Command From the Tools Menu DxDesigner Arguments
Removing a Command From the Tools Menu

You can only remove custom commands in the Tools menu. You cannot remove built-in commands.
22
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Customize. The Customize Tools Menu dialog box appears. 2. In the Menu Contents field, select the command you want to remove. 3. Click Remove. 4. Click OK.
Related Topics
o o o
Adding a Command to the Tools Menu Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry DxDesigner Arguments
DxDesigner Arguments
Each application may support a set of predefined variables called arguments. Arguments are not required. You can specify arguments for any program that you add to the Tools menu. Enter arguments (in uppercase) in the Arguments field of the Customize Tools Menu dialog box. If you want to use more than one argument, leave a space between each argument entry. Note If the command is named the same as the executable, the application closes the window when done executing. If you want to keep the window open, use the /k qualifier as the first argument. Argument entries are case sensitive and must be entered in uppercase. Table 1-3. DxDesigner Arguments Listing Argument $BLOCKPAGE $BLOCKTYPE $PROJDIR $COMPNAME $NETNAME Description The current sheet of the schematic. A string that defines the type of drawing (SCHEMATIC or SYMBOL). This string is always uppercase. The path to the current project directory. The name of the selected component. The name of the selected net. $BLOCKNAME The file name of the current symbol or schematic.
23
Introduction to DxDesigner Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner
Table 1-3. DxDesigner Arguments Listing (cont.) Argument $PINNAME Description The name of the selected pin.
Related Topics
o o o
Adding a Command to the Tools Menu Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry Removing a Command From the Tools Menu
Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner

Some features in DxDesigner require a separate license. Until the license is activated within the DxDesigner session, those features are not available. Following are some of the features requiring a license: DxDataBook: Enables the DxDataBook Window. See the DxDataBook Users Guide for more information. Hyperlynx Analog: Enables the Hyperlynx Analog features available from the HLA simulation toolbar and menu items such as Tools > Convert PSpice Libraries and Tools > Generate VHDL Model. See the HyperLynx Analog Users Manual.
Prerequisite
The feature you are trying to access must first be installed along with a valid license.
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Licensing (category). The Settings dialog displays the Licensing options. 2. Select the feature you need during your DxDesigner session. 3. Click OK. The GUI elements for the licensed feature appears in DxDesigner. If they do not, restart DxDesigner. Reverse the process to free the license for other users.
Related Topic
24
Introduction to DxDesigner Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands
Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands

You can run DxDesigner functions with commands from the DxDesigner Command Line rather than from other GUI elements. See the DxDesigner Reference Manual the for the command associated with DxDesigner features.
Procedures
1. Enable the command line by pressing the space bar. The command line entry field is a dockable bar. You can drag it to the edge of the application window and the bar will dock to the edge of the window automatically. To undock it, drag it into the application window. 2. Enter the command in the Command Line and press Enter. 3. If the command opens a dialog box, you can use the following Hot Keys to select items in the dialog box as an alternative to mouse clicks. To open a pulldown list, use ALT+ DOWN ARROW. To close a pulldown list, use ALT+ DOWN ARROW or ENTER. To select a value from the pulldown list use UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW. To select a new value, type the first letter of the value you want. The box will be automatically filled in.
Related Topics
Designing in a Multi-User Environment

Because DxDesigner uses a central database, multiple users can work concurrently on the same design.
Requirements
You must be working within a Client/Server environment. Your System Administrator sets up this environment, and provides designers with paths to libraries, projects, etc.
25
Introduction to DxDesigner Designing in a Multi-User Environment
Concurrency Scenario
Multiple users can open the same design in DxDesigner. DxDesigner locks files on a sheet-by-sheet basis. The first user to open a sheet has editing (read/write) privileges. If additional users open a sheet that is already being edited, DxDesigner opens the sheet in read-only mode and specifies the user who is editing it. See Figure 1-2. Changes made in the editing session appear immediately in the read-only sessions, with the following exceptions:. Changes that you make to properties, bus signals, or bus rippers on a sheet are not immediately updated. You must select the Tools > Update Other Objects dialog and choose the range (scope) that these changes will take effect. See Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. This controlled update process can be used to prevent potential conflict with other designers working on the same project, but a different sheet at the same time as you make your change. Figure 1-2. Multiple Users Accessing Same DxDesigner Schematic Sheet
26
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide
27
28
Chapter 2 DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects

The Project tab of the Navigator window shows the structure of all the design objects in your project. These are the objects that represent electrical elements of your design: boards, components, and connectivity. The hierarchical structure of the Project Navigator reflects the hierarchical structure of your design. The objects in the Project Navigator are as follows: Projects: A project is DxDesigners largest container of design data. You can have only one project open in DxDesigner at a time. Boards: Your projects can contain designs for multiple boards. Each board and its hierarchical structure appears under the Boards item in the Project Navigator window. Blocks: DxDesigner uses the word block to refer to the following design objects:
o o
Root Blocks Hierarchical Blocks
Schematics: A schematic is a block of design data that you view and edit graphically. A schematic can contain multiple sheets in a flat design or blocks of other schematics and spreadsheets in a hierarchical design. Sheets: A sheet is a piece of a schematic block. One sheet at a time is open in the schematic editor regardless of the number of sheets a schematic has. Sheets are connected by onsheet and offsheet connectors. Spreadsheets (ICT Designs): A spreadsheet is a block of design data that you view in a table format. In a spreadsheet, symbols populate the columns and nets populate the rows. You define connectivity where the symbol pins column and the nets row intersect. Symbols: Symbols are any component you place on a schematic or spreadsheet, including sub-blocks. They appear in the Project Navigator window under the schematic or spreadsheet on which they are placed. Nets: Nets define the connectivity among pins of components. Nets can be single nets, buses, or differential pairs. Ports: Ports create connectivity between an underlying schematic and a higher-level blocks pins.
29
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects The Project Navigator
Related Topics
The Project Navigator

The DxDesigner Project Navigator contains a project tree that shows your designs and their hierarchies. It dynamically updates and displays the project data in two primary structures: the design hierarchy and the list of blocks. See Figure 2-1. The project hierarchy is as follows: Project > Boards > Schematics > Blocks[0..n] > Leaf Cells, where the number of blocks can be zero to an indefinite number greater than zero. The complexity of blocks containing other blocks define the complexity of the design hierarchy.
Procedures
Toggling the Project Navigator On or Off Expanding the Navigator Hierarchy Manipulating Objects from the Navigator (rename, filter, reset filters) Cross Probing
Related Topics
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Navigator Settings - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual Figure 2-1. DxDesigner Navigator Primary Structures
Toggling the Project Navigator On or Off

Toggle the Project Navigator off to save screen space for the design window.
30
Procedure
1. Toggle on or off with View > Navigator.
Related Topics
Expanding the Navigator Hierarchy

The Project Navigator shows a hierarchy tree with expandable and collapsible nodes as shown in the figure below.
Procedure
Figure 2-2. DxDesigner Project Navigator Hierarchy Example
Related Topics
Manipulating Objects from the Navigator

From the Navigator you can select sheets, symbols, and nets and manipulate them as shown in the following procedures:
31
Procedures
Filtering the Project Navigator List Resetting Navigator Filters and Displaying Complete Objects List Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator symbol or as an ICT
In the Navigator, blocks are denoted as either a schematic with the object with the symbol.
Related Topics
Filtering the Project Navigator List

Filter the Project Navigator when you have a large list of objects and you want to reduce it to a manageable size.
Procedure
1. Position the cursor over one of the objects in the list you want to filter. For example, if you want to filter a list of blocks, position your cursor over any block object in the list. See the following figure. You could also filter on sheets, symbols, or nets.
2. Right-click > Filter. In this example, the Filter blocks dialog appears. A similar dialog box appears for sheet, symbol, or net selections. 3. Select either the Wildcard or Reg. exp. (regular expression) radio button for your search.
32
4. Click the Add button shown in the following figure. A new line is added in the Filter blocks dialog list box.
5. As shown in the previous figure, select the Property type you want to use from the dropdown list. This example uses the Name of the block objects for the filter operation. 6. Edit the Pattern field to restrain the filter operation. This example is searching for all blocks that begin with pci, by using the wildcard operator * as shown in the previous figure. 7. Click the OK button. The list is filtered down. In this example, the filtering causes the following list to be displayed:
Related Topics
o o
Resetting Navigator Filters and Displaying Complete Objects List Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator
33
Resetting Navigator Filters and Displaying Complete Objects List

Reset the filter to display all the objects in the list.
Procedure
1. Position the cursor over any object in the Project Navigator list. 2. Right-click > Reset all filters.
Related Topics
o o
Filtering the Project Navigator List Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator
Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator

Rename a Project Navigator object to make more meaning names for objects besides the default names given by DxDesigner.
Procedure
1. Right-click the object and click Rename from the popup menu. The name becomes an editable text field. For example: 2. Type the new name of the object and press Enter. The object shows the new name.
Related Topics
o o
Filtering the Project Navigator List Resetting Navigator Filters and Displaying Complete Objects List
Cross Probing
Cross-probing means that when you select a design object in one tool (or window in DxDesigner) it is highlighted in the other tool (or window). Cross-probing causes design changes to appear immediately, with no need to refresh manually. There are the following methods of cross probing: Cross Probing within DxDesigner - The DxDesigner Navigator cross-probes bidirectionally with the DxDesigner Schematic Editor and the DxDesigner InterConnect
34
Editor (or ICT Viewer) windows (internal cross-probing). Internal cross-probing is always enabled. Cross Probing from the Quick Connection View
Related Topics
Cross Probing within DxDesigner

There is no special setup required to enable this feature. It is always enabled.
Procedure
Figure 2-3. Project Navigator - Example of Internal Cross-Probe Viewing
35
Related Topics
Cross Probing
Cross Probing from the Quick Connection View

The File > Export > Quick Connection View option is a way to create a generic netlist that you can use to visually debug board connectivity or easily check other connections such as power supply (generally global nets) connections. Quick Connection View works on packaged and un-packaged designs. If no Ref Designator property is available, the Id is used instead. DxDesigner saves the Quick Connection View generic netlist in a file that you specify, and it displays the results in a Quick Connection View tab. The following topics describe what you can do with the Quick Connection View:
Procedures
Cross-Probing from Quick Connection View Tab Quick Connection View Output - Dialog Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition Interpreting the Netlist Output
Related Topics
Exchanging Data with Layout Tools
Cross-Probing from Quick Connection View Tab

Figure 2-4 shows an example of a Quick Connection View tab that is used to cross-probe a selected net with the Navigator window and the Schematic window.
36
Figure 2-4. Quick Connection View Cross-Probing Example
Related Topics
o o o
Quick Connection View Output - Dialog Interpreting the Netlist Output Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition
Quick Connection View Output - Dialog

When you execute File > Export > Quick Connection View, the related dialog box appears.
37
From the dialog box you can set the following: Top Level Block - define the top level block that you want to netlist Output File - define where you will store the .txt output Single Line Per Net - If set, configures the output to put all large nets on one line (20 is the maximum number of pins displayed per net before a line break is issued). If unset, configures the output to break large nets into separate lines as shown in the following example: (unset)
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' GND-B C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C49-2 C52-2 C53-2 U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4
(The /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on multiple lines)
(set)
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C49-2 ...
(all /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on one, possibly long, line)
Separate No/Single Pin Nets - If set, configures the output to list the No/Single Pin nets in a separate section of the netlist as noted by the following entry:
# begin one pin nets list
Display Un-connected Pins - If set, configures the output to list the un-connected pins in a separate section of the netlist as noted by the following entry:
# begin un-connected pins list
Display Power/Ground separately - If set, displays the power and ground nets separate from other nets instead of being merged with them. (unset) - The power and ground nets are displayed in the list with other nets as shown with the ground net RLDRAM1/GND in the following example:
NET NET NET . . : '/RLDRAM1/CLK' U32-J12 U33-J12 U34-J12 U35-J12 U36-J12 ... : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C213-2 C215-2 ... : '/RLDRAM1/NCS0' U32-L2 U34-L2 U36-L2 U38-L2 .
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed with other non-power/non-ground nets such as /RLDRAM1/CLK and /RLDRAM1/NCS0.)
38
(set) - If set, you have the following option on how to split the Power/Ground nets: (For more information see Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition) Split the Power/Ground into: - Explicit - connected to a P&G (Power & Ground) tap - Implicit - defined in the PDB (Parts Database) (unset) - If unset, all the power and ground nets are displayed in one separate section of the list as shown below:
# begin Power&Ground net list . . . NET : '/MICRO1/REG_ECC_DDR_SDRAM_UPR/GND' R265-8 R266-5 R266-6 ... NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C213-2 C215-2 ... NET : '/MICRO1/AMD_8111_TO_HUB1/1.8V' C120-1 C122-1 C123-1 . . .
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed in a section with other power/ground nets.) (set) - If set, the Explicit Power and Ground nets are listed in an Explicitdesignated section of the list. The Implicit Power and Ground nets are listed in a separate section designated for Implicit Power and Ground nets as shown in the following example:
# begin EXPLICIT Power&Ground net list NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ... NET : '/CLOCK_DIST1/GND' C24-1 C25-2 C26-1 C27-2 C55-2 C56-2 ... NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4 . . . # begin IMPLICIT Power&Ground net list NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9 ... NET : '/RLDRAM1/0.9V' U32-A1 U32-C1 U32-C12 U32-T1 U32-T12 ... . . .
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed in a section with other Implicit power and ground nets, meaning these were defined in the Parts Database. Explicit power and ground nets are listed in a section that groups nets that are connected to a power or ground tap.) Exclude Special Components - If set, configures the output netlist to omit connections to Special Components as defined in Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory), which are typically power, ground, hierarchical ports and sheet connectors that have no part number associated with the symbols.
39
Flat mode - If set, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name above each group of related nets as shown in the following example (Single Line Per Net is also set in this example): (set)
FlatNet: PAR NET : '/MICRO1/AMD_8111_TO_HUB1/PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6 NET : '/MICRO1/PAR' NET : '/MICRO1/PCI_CONN1/PAR' J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
Compress Flat Nets - (Only available if Flat Mode is set). If set, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name preceding the compressed net and also eliminates the hierarchical pins. The example below shows the compressed PAR net from above:
. . . FlatNet: 'PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6 J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1 . . .
(unset) The three '/MICRO1/... net lines are listed without the FlatNet line preceding them. Display Properties/Net Classes - If set, the output netlist displays the NetClass and Property associated with each net. The bolded lines below show an example that includes NetClass and Property (Flat mode was also set):
FlatNet: 1.25V NetClass=POWER NET : '/MICRO1/184PINX72DDR_LWR1/DDR_VREF' NET : '/MICRO1/184PINX72DDR_LWR2/DDR_VREF' NET : '/MICRO1/184PINX72DDR_UPR1/DDR_VREF' NET : '/MICRO1/184PINX72DDR_UPR2/DDR_VREF' Property: PIN SEQUENCE=2 Property: PIN SEQUENCE=1
DDR_VREF-I1 DDR_VREF-I1 DDR_VREF-I1 DDR_VREF-I1
J1_MEM_L1-1 J1_MEM_L2-1 J1_MEM_U1-1 . . .
Display Components - If set, the output netlist displays a separate components list section that identifies components and their properties as shown in the following example:
# begin components list COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U100' 'Logic:ls374.1' Property: 'Cell Name'='20PSOIC' Property: 'DXDB_LIBNAME'='' Property: 'Part Label'='MGC1031' Property: 'Part Name'='74LS374' COMP: '74LS08-SMD' 'U2' 'Logic:ls08.1' Property: 'Cell Name'='14PSOIC' Property: 'DXDB_LIBNAME'='' Property: 'Part Label'='MGC1030' Property: 'Part Name'='74LS08' . . .
40
Related Topics
o o o
Cross-Probing from Quick Connection View Tab Interpreting the Netlist Output Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition
Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition

An explicit way to define a Power Supply is through a special symbol in the schematic. Power Supply nets (as defined in the Part Editor) include Power and Ground (P&G) nets. These nets are equivalent to the Globals nets that are defined in DxDesigner as the nets connected to a special symbol of type PIN with a property Global Signal Name. The value of this property defines the name of the global net. These explicit power supply nets appear directly in the Quick Connection View netlist. There is another way to define a Power Supply directly in the Part Editor with no need to see this corresponding Power pin on the symbol. This is what is called an implicit Power Supply. The connectivity of these implicit power supply nets is not defined in the schematic, but in layout.
Related Topics
o o o
Cross-Probing from Quick Connection View Tab Quick Connection View Output - Dialog Interpreting the Netlist Output
Interpreting the Netlist Output

The Quick Connection View netlist is divided into fields separated with a separator (a space in these examples) as follows (also see Figure 2-5):
FIELD1[separator]FIELD2[separator]FIELD3[separator]FIELD4[separator]
FIELD1 - Is a keyword to identify the type of net as either:

o o
NET PIN
FIELD2 - Is the colon character (:) FIELD3 - Shows the hierarchical net name in between single quotes FIELD4 - Shows the net connections to all pins
41
Figure 2-5. Quick Connection View Netlist Example 1
Related Topics
o o o
Cross-Probing from Quick Connection View Tab Quick Connection View Output - Dialog Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition
Cross Probing Between DxDesigner and Your Layout Tool

You can cross probe between DxDesigner schematic object, for example, a symbol or net) or Project Navigator objects and your PCB design.
Procedure:
Do one of the following:
42
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Projects
In the DxDesigner schematic window or Navigator tree, select an object. In the PCB Layout design, select an object.
Result: The equivalent of that object highlights in the other tool.
Related Topics
Cross Probing
Projects
A project is DxDesigners largest container of design data. You can have only one project open in DxDesigner at a time.
Procedures
Preparing Project Settings Creating a Project Adding Libraries to a Project (Netlist workflow) Opening a Project Backing Up and Restoring a Sheet or ICT
Related Topics
The Project Navigator DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
o o o o o o o
Boards Blocks Schematics Sheets Spreadsheets (ICT Designs) Symbols Nets
Preparing Project Settings

An administrator can define company-wide standards or styles for selected user-preferences (for example, object colors and schematic borders) in the standard DxDesigner.xml file. The .prj
43
template file can specify project settings such as paths to the Central Library (for workflow types that are integrated with the layout tool only) that you can then apply when you create a new project. Administrators also should perform other tasks such as setting the WDIR environment variable and setting soft pathnames before you create your project. See Preparing your Environment for Project Development in the DxDesigner Administrators Guide. For information on all the settings available from (DxDesigner) Setup > Settings, see Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Procedures
Configuring Special Components Defining Bus Contents
Related Topics
Templates that Define Project Settings
Templates that Define Project Settings

Use a template when creating a project to set the following locations: The borders file, borders.ini The special components file, speccomp.ini, which defines hierarchical ports, power/ground, and page connectors symbols The bus contents file, busconts.ini, which specifies re-usable bus definition Any custom borders you want to apply to your schematics. For more information on borders, see the topic Framing Schematic Sheets with Borders. Remote server name. For more information, see the Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide.
Templates are project files (name.prj) that are stored in specific file locations where DxDesigner finds them. Another useful setting to store in a template .prj file is system Auto Backup settings. For more information see Changing Backup Settings in the Remote Server Configuration Manager Administrators Guide. In summary, you can use any setting that normally goes in a .prj file in a template file.
44
Related Topics
Creating a Project Creating a Template File in the DxDesigner Administrators Guide - describes how to create a template file (both by an administrator or a schematic capture designer) project.prj File in the DxDesigner Reference Manual - describes the content and structure of a project file.
Configuring Special Components

Use DxDesigner to create lists of available ports, Onsheet/Offsheet pins and Power/Ground pins. You then add special components from this list as you design. In addition, the Special Component Definition includes the option to specify a custom ripper graphic. Table 2-1. Special Component Definitions Component Port Definition A component of type pin that indicates that the net connected to this component is an interface signal. It represents a connection to a specific pin on the corresponding symbol. naming the component with the same name as the symbol pin specifies a connection down through the hierarchy. A component of type annotate that contains one pin. Indicates that the net to which it is attached is coming from another sheet in the design. Labels on Onsheet pins have no electrical significance, and will generate a check warning. A component of type annotate that contains one pin. Indicates that the net to which it is attached is going to another sheet in the design. Labels on Offsheet pins have no electrical significance, and will generate a check warning.
Onsheet Pin
Offsheet Pin
Power/Ground A component of type pin that contains one pin. Indicates that the net to which Pin it is attached is connected to either power or ground. Net Ripper You can create and use one custom ripper graphic, which gets used each time a net is ripped from a bus. See Setting a Project to Use a Customized Ripper Graphic. Once a new ripper graphic is defined, all newly-created ripped nets use the new graphic. (See Ripping Nets from a Bus.) Existing rippers will not change unless you specifically update them in any of the following scopes: Project level, Board level, Schematic level, or Sheet level. See Updating Ripper Graphic to a Newly-Defined Graphic. Use the following procedures to create or modify a list of symbol names to associate with each type of special component. You select from this list when you add a special component to your design.
45
Procedures
Adding a Symbol to the Special Component Toolbar List Removing a Symbol from the Special Components Toolbar List Rearranging Symbols in the Special Components List Adding a Special Component to a Schematic Setting a Project to Use a Customized Ripper Graphic Updating Ripper Graphic to a Newly-Defined Graphic Updating Link Symbols
Related Topics
Preparing Project Settings
Adding a Symbol to the Special Component Toolbar List

Specify in the Special Components settings window which components from the Central Library you want to add to the special components interface.
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory). 2. From the pulldown, select the type of component you want to edit. 3. Use the New (insert) button type you have selected. to open a list of available symbols for the component
4. Add as many symbols as you want for each type of component you select in the pulldown. 5. Click Apply to finish building your list and leave the Settings dialog box open, or click OK to complete this process and close the Settings dialog box.
Related Topic
Removing a Symbol from the Special Components Toolbar List

Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory). 2. From the pulldown, select the type of component whose list you want to modify.
46
3. Select the symbol name you want to remove. 4. Delete as many symbols as you want for each type of component you select in the pulldown. 5. Click Apply to finish building your list and leave the Settings dialog box open, or click OK to complete this process and close the Settings dialog box.
Related Topic
Rearranging Symbols in the Special Components List

Rearrange the symbols to suit your convenience in finding and selecting them.
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory). 2. From the pulldown, select the type of component whose list you want to modify. 3. Within the list, select a symbol, and click the Move Up or Move Down button.
4. Click Apply to finish editing your list and leave the Settings dialog box open, or click OK to complete this process and close the Settings dialog box.
Related Topic
Adding a Special Component to a Schematic

Procedure
1. On the Add toolbar, click the Special Components button from the list (for example, LINKS). and select a component
You can also choose Add > Special Components to select special components (see Add Menu in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for more information about special components). 2. In the DxDesigner Schematic Window, right-click to place the special component on the schematic. If you select a special component that has not been configured, the Settings window appears.
47
Note Onsheet/offsheet special components are dynamic links which allow you to view objects across multiple schematic sheets (see Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets).
Related Topic
Setting a Project to Use a Customized Ripper Graphic

DxDesigner comes with a standard ripper graphic . However, anyone that can create or update a library symbol in the Central Library can define a custom ripper symbol. Once the custom symbol is created and placed in the library, a project can be set up to use the symbol as a ripper graphic. A custom ripper is available with a DxDesigner installation at: <install_dir>\<release_dir>\SDD_HOME\standard\examples\SampleLib2007\SymbolLibs\ builtin\sym\ripper.1 Note Only one ripper graphic can be defined for each project.
Prerequisite
Create a custom symbol as described in Creating a Ripper Symbol in the DxDesigner Symbol Editor manual.
Procedure
1. In DxDesigner, select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory). 2. From the pulldown, select Net Ripper. 3. Use the New (insert) button to open a Net ripper dialog.
4. Navigate to the location that contains the custom ripper symbol. 5. Select the desired symbol and click OK. Note: You can only select one net ripper symbol at a time. If you want to switch to a different custom ripper symbol, you must first select and delete the current one from the list.
48
Results
Any new rippers you create will use the new graphic. Existing rippers will not change unless you specifically update them in any of the following scopes: Project level, Board level, Schematic level, or Sheet level. See Updating Ripper Graphic to a Newly-Defined Graphic.
Related Topic
Updating Ripper Graphic to a Newly-Defined Graphic

It is possible that you want to change the ripper graphic after your project, board, schematic, or sheet already contains bus rippers.
Prerequisite
To specify a new ripper graphic, perform the steps outlined in Setting a Project to Use a Customized Ripper Graphic.
Procedure
1. From the Project Navigator, select/open the sheet within the range (scope) of the ripper change. For descriptions of the different ranges, see Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. 2. Select Tools > Update Other Objects to open the Update Other Objects dialog. 3. In the Update Other Objects dialog, in the Type section check Bus Rippers and in the Range section, select the appropriate range to match the sheet you opened in Step 1. 4. Click OK.
Results
The ripper graphic changes on the opened schematic sheet, and all other sheets specified in the Range.
Related Topic
Updating Link Symbols

You update link symbols to: Group link symbols with the same name and located on the same schematic design. Link symbols are symbols specified as special component links.
49
Annotate each link symbol in the group with an Xref property value for the specified range (except for the link symbol being updated). Xref property values describe the location of other link symbols in the group. Note The local project database (iCDB) does not support multiple properties with the same values, consequently fewer Xref properties may be annotated to link symbols (for example, two link symbols with the same name and zone location are only listed once).
Prerequisites
Set the link symbol annotation format (see Setting Annotations for Link Symbols on a Sheet). Open a sheet within the desired range. For descriptions of the different ranges, see Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner window, select Tools > Update Other Objects. 2. In the Update Other Objects dialog box, select Annotations as the type (all object types are checked by default). 3. Select a range for the annotation update to take affect (Project is checked by default). 4. Click OK.
Results
The link symbols are updated for the specified range (link symbols with the same name and location are grouped, and their Xref property annotations are displayed). Note The Xref property is not updated if the link symbol already has the correct property value, and all obsolete or extraneous Xref properties are removed from the link symbols.
Related Topics
Configuring Special Components Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets
Defining Bus Contents

You can define one or more bus bundles that are made up of any number of signals. The bundle information is stored in a bus contents file with a default name of busconts.ini. This busconts.ini file can be shared by any number of projects if it is placed in an accessible file location.
50
Prerequisite
Specify where you want the busconts.ini file to reside from Setup > Settings > Project (category) Bus Contents (field).
Procedure
1. Open the Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Bus Contents dialog. 2. In the Name column, click <Click to add new bus>. 3. Give the bus a name in the Name column, such as CONTROL_SIGNALS or DATA_BUSES. 4. Click in the Value column next to the Name to specify the value of the bus, such as: CLOCK, RESET or DATA_A(0:7), DATA_B(8:16). 5. You can also import other bus contents file configuration data into the current projects busconts.ini file from DxDesigner as follows: a. In the Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Bus Contents dialog, click the Import (button). A Merge Buses dialog appears. b. If the contents of the Merge Buses dialog are satisfactory, click OK. This information is added to the current list. 6. Click Apply or OK.
Results
The definitions you created are stored in the busconts.ini file that is specified in the Setup > Settings > Project (category) Bus Contents (field). The next time you create a bus, these predefined buses are available from the Properties window in the Name propertys Value pulldown list.
Related Topics
Changing Bus Contents Preparing Project Settings
Changing Bus Contents

Procedure
1. Open the Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Bus Contents dialog. 2. Click the Name or Value you wish to change and edit the field. 3. You can also import additonal bus contents file configuration data into the current projects buscont.ini file from DxDesigner as follows:
51
a. In the Bus Contents dialog, click the Import (button). A Merge Buses dialog appears. b. If the contents are satisfactory, click OK. This information is added to the current list. 4. Click Apply or OK. The buscont.ini file is updated, however your changes do not appear in the project yet. 5. From the Project Navigator, select/open a sheet within the range (scope) where you want the bus contents change to take effect. For descriptions of the different ranges, see Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. 6. Select Tools > Update Other Objects to open the Update Other Objects dialog. 7. In the Update Other Objects dialog, in the Type section check Bus Signals and in the Range section, select the appropriate range to match the sheet you opened in Step 5. 8. Click OK.
Related Topics
Defining Bus Contents Preparing Project Settings
Creating a Project
This procedure describes how to create a new project using a default or a custom template in the Netlist workflow.
Prerequisites
The appropriate person must have created custom project templates and specified special components. See Preparing Project Settings.
Procedure
1. Select File > New > Project. 2. In the New Project dialog box, select a Project Template from the available list for the workflow you are using. Any custom templates that have been created appear in this list. The following figure shows an example of templates that might be available from each workflow.
52
3. Enter the directory location where you want to create the project folder. 4. Enter the name of your project. 5. Netlist Workflow Only: Select a layout tool from the drop-down list. Note that if you select the pads_template from the list of Netlist templates, the PADS layout tool is already selected. For more information on workflows, see DxDesigner Workflows. 6. If you want to use concurrent design in a client-server environment, enable the checkbox and enter the path to the server. For more information, see the topic RSCM Server Administration in the Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide. 7. Click OK to create the project. The new project appears in the Project Navigator.
Results
You are ready to create a board and its root block. See Creating a Board.
Related Topics
Projects DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
53
Adding Libraries to a Project (Netlist workflow)

You can add legacy DxDesigner symbol libraries to either a new or existing Netlist workflow project. You can also add libraries in this format from any network location accessible to DxDesigner.
Procedure
1. Open the Symbol Libraries window with Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Symbol Libraries (subcategory). 2. Click the Add icon . The Library dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the symbol library you want to add. You can also add a legacy library from anywhere on you network where it is accessible to your system. Note: In the Library dialog, you can specify an Alias for the library, which has the following restriction: The library alias name must start with an alpha character (A-Z or a-z) followed by zero or more alpha numeric characters (A-Z, a-z, or 0-9) and underscores _. The alias name cannot have more than two underscore characters _ in a row. For example: A_B is allowed, but A__B is not allowed. 4. Optional: To edit the library list, do one of the following: Delete a library by selecting it and clicking the Delete icon . .
Move a library up in the list by selecting it and clicking the Move Up icon
Move a library down in the list by selecting it and clicking the Move Down icon
5. Click OK.
Results
The library appears in the list color-coded as follows: Read-only libraries are white. Writeable libraries are green. Mega libraries are Blue Note Mega libraries are store in a proprietary, compiled format. DxDesigner decompiles the libraries automatically before displaying them in the DxDataBook window, the CL View tab.
Related Topics
Projects
54
DxDesigner Workflows DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
Opening a Project
Open a project with any of the methods below.
Procedure
Navigate to the project directory and double-click on the <project>.prj file. Open DxDesigner and select the File menu. Previously-opened (Most Recently Used, MRU) projects appear as a list near the bottom of the menu, as shown in the following example. Click the project you want to open. (Also see Customizing the Most Recently Used (MRU) Project List.)
Open DxDesigner and select File > Open > Project. Navigate to the <project>.prj file of the project you want to open and open it. For more information see Starting DxDesigner on page 13.
Result
The following conditions may exist upon opening a project: If this design has not been run through the DxDesigner Diagnostics tool, a message window appears asking if you want to execute it. For more information, see Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool on page 247. If the project uses the Remote Server Configuration Manager (RSCM) and another person has the sheet open that you are trying to access, a message appears at the top of the schematic window such as: Schematic is in readonly mode [Schematic locked by DxD on computer: <computer_name>]. If multiple people try to access the same schematic, their computer names go in a firstcome, first-served queue. When the person who locked the schematic closes it, the next computer in the queue gets write access. For more information on RSCM, see the Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide.
55
Related Topics
Projects DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Customizing the Most Recently Used (MRU) Project List
Customizing the Most Recently Used (MRU) Project List

DxDesigner stores the path to the most recently used project in your %WDIR%\DxDesigner.xml file along with other session settings. (For more information on this file, see DxDesigner.xml File in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.) When you open the File menu, these MRU entries appear near the bottom of the menu as shown in the Opening a Project topic. The list is a first-in, first-out stack. You can manage the MRU list in the following ways: Changing the Default MRU Size Setting Removing Old Entries From the MRU List
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Changing the Default MRU Size Setting

The default length of the MRU list issued with the software is to store up to 6 entries as defined in the \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\DxDesigner.xml file by the MRU_SIZE line as shown in the following example:
<DxDesigner> <SETTINGS> . . . <key name="MRU_SIZE" value="6"/> </SETTINGS> </DxDesigner>
Procedure
1. Open your %WDIR%\DxDesigner.xml file in a plain text editor. 2. Locate the SETTINGS section of the DxDesigner.xml file as indicated in the previous example. 3. Add (or modify) the MRU_SIZE line within the SETTINGS section to include your desired value. For example, if you want DxDesigner to only save the path to the last two projects opened, add (or modify) the following line in the SETTINGS section:
<key name="MRU_SIZE" value="2"/>
56
4. If you choose a value lower then the current number of projects displayed in the MRU list, you should delete the old entries as described in the topic Removing Old Entries From the MRU List. 5. Save and close the file. Your change takes affect next time you open DxDesigner.
Related Topics
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Opening a Project
o
Removing Old Entries From the MRU List

Your %WDIR%\DxDesigner.xml stores the most recently used project paths in a MRU_PROJECTS section as shown in the following example.
<DxDesigner> <SETTINGS> . . . <key name="MRU_PROJECTS"> <value>C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj</value> <value>C:\Projects\memory\mem1.prj</value> <value>C:\Projects\memory\mem2.prj</value> <value>C:\Projects\CPU\cpu1.prj</value> <value>C:\Projects\CPU\cpu2.prj</value> </key> </SETTINGS>
Procedure
1. Open your %WDIR%\DxDesigner.xml file in a plain text editor. 2. Locate the MRU_PROJECTS section of the DxDesigner.xml file as indicated in the previous example. 3. Delete the applicable <value> line(s). 4. Save and close the file. Your change takes affect next time you open DxDesigner.
Related Topics
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Opening a Project
o

57
Backing Up and Restoring a Sheet or ICT

Use the Backup and Rollback (restore) functions to return the currently-displayed schematic sheet or ICT to a prior state. To avoid accidentally rolling back a sheet/ICT that another designer is working on concurrently, you can only backup and restore the active isheet or ICT. Backup stores the present state of the active schematic/ICT and makes it available to the Rollback feature. You can perform a Backup manually at any time, or automatically perform it each time you open a sheet/ICT. Rollback restores the displayed sheet or ICT and its constraints to one of the previous Backup states. Note If your sheet contains instance data from a hierarchical block, you will get the following message when using backup: Backup operation will not store instance data from the hierarchical blocks. Its recommended to use Archiver to include instance data. To backup the entire design database rather than just individual sheets or ICTs, use the Auto Backup system utility. For more information, see Auto Backup in the Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide.
Procedures
Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Manually Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Automatically Restoring the Current sheet/ICT to a Previously Backed up State
Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Manually

1. Select File > Backup. 2. Optional Step: Label the backup by entering a comment in the status line of the Output window.
Related Topics
Projects Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Automatically Restoring the Current sheet/ICT to a Previously Backed up State
Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Automatically

Select Setup > Settings > Advanced > Create automatic backup.
58
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Boards
Result: DxDesigner backs up each sheet/ICT when you open it.
Related Topics
Projects Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Manually Restoring the Current sheet/ICT to a Previously Backed up State
Restoring the Current sheet/ICT to a Previously Backed up State

1. Open the list of backups with File > Rollback. A list of previous backups appears. Each backup is identified with a time/date stamp and optional comment you entered when you created it. 2. Select the backup you want to restore. Result: The displayed sheet or ICT returns to the state of the backup you selected.
Related Topics
Projects Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Manually Backing up the Current Sheet/ICT Automatically
Boards
Your projects can contain designs for multiple boards. Each board and its heretical structure appears under the Boards item in the Project Navigator window.
Procedures
Creating a Board Deleting a Board Switching a Boards Root Block
Related Topics
o o
Projects Boards
59
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Boards o o o o o o
Blocks Schematics Sheets Spreadsheets (ICT Designs) Symbols Nets
Creating a Board
Create a board when you want to keep multiple board designs in the same project. You can create a board from scratch with an empty schematic block as its root block, or you can create a board that uses an existing schematic or ICT block as its root block.
Procedures
Create a board from scratch with an empty schematic block as its root block with File > New > Board. A new board appears in the Project Navigators Boards tree with the new schematic block as its root block. Create a board from an existing schematic or ICT block with a right-click on the block in the Blocks list followed by a click on the Create Board popup menu item. A new board appears in the Project Navigators Boards tree with the root block elevated from the Blocks list to the new board item.
Related Topics
Boards
o o
Deleting a Board Switching a Boards Root Block
Deleting a Board
You can delete a board two ways, and each are easy. But you should be aware how DxDesigner handles the root block in each case.
Procedures
You can delete the board with a right-click on the board you want to delete in the Project Navigator tree followed by a click on Delete in the popup menu.
60
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Boards
The board disappears from the Project Navigator, but the root block remains in the Project Navigator only it appears in the Blocks list as a generic block instead of as a root block. Any hierarchical structure under the root block remains attached to the root block. You can delete the board by deleting its root block. Delete the root block with a right click on the root block followed by a click on Delete in the popup menu. Both the board and the root block disappear from the Project Navigator. All hierarchical blocks that were under the root block remain in the Blocks list and retain their own internal hierarchical structure.
Related Topics
Boards
o o
Creating a Board Switching a Boards Root Block
Switching a Boards Root Block

You can swap a boards root block with another block in the Project Navigators Blocks list.
Procedure
1. Right-click the block in the Blocks list that you want to be the new root block. 2. Click the Set as Root popup menu item. If you have more than one board, a flyout appears on the popup menu from which you can choose the board for which you want the block to become the root block.
Before: Schematic1 is the root block
After: Block2 is the root block
61
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Blocks
Related Topics
Boards
o o
Creating a Board Deleting a Board
Blocks
A block can be either a schematic or a spreadsheet. A schematic block is a graphical view of a design. A spreadsheet block is a table view of a design with rows of nets and columns of components, and connectivity defined at the intersection of a particular nets row and a particular component pins column. A hierarchical design has multiple levels of schematic blocks and/or spreadsheet blocks.
Procedures
Creating a Block Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block Simulating a Block
Related Topics
o o o o o o o o
Projects Boards Blocks Schematics Sheets Spreadsheets (ICT Designs) Symbols Nets
62
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Blocks
Root Blocks
Each board has a single block associated with it as a root block. The root block is the top-most level of hierarchy for a boards design. The root block appears in the Project Navigator window immediately under the board it belongs to. A root block does not appear in the Blocks list. All non-root blocks appear in the blocks list, and all blocks that are part of the hierarchy of a boards design also appear under its parent block in the hierarchy.
Related Topics
Blocks
Creating a Block
You can create a block as either a schematic or a spreadsheet (ICT Design).
Prerequisites
A project must be open in DxDesigner. See Opening a Project.
Procedure
Create a schematic block with File > New > Schematic. A new schematic appears in the Project Navigator under Blocks and as a tab in the Schematic Editor. Note If the Schematic Editor tab contains regular text, you are working with a block (italicized text indicates that it is an instance of a block). Create a spreadsheet block (ICT Design) with File > New > Interconnectivity Table. See Creating an ICT Block. A new spreadsheet appears in the Blocks list of the Project Navigator.
Related Topics
Blocks
o o o o
Creating a Block Building Hierarchical Designs Removing a Block from the Project Navigator Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator
63
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Blocks o o
Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block Simulating a Block
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet
Removing a Block from the Project Navigator

You can remove a block from the design hierarchy without removing it from the Project Navigator.
Procedure
1. Select the block in the Project Navigator tree. 2. Delete it with Edit > Delete. The block disappears from the hierarchy but remains in the Blocks list as shown below.
Related Topics
Blocks
o o
Creating a Block Building Hierarchical Designs
64
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Schematics o o o o
Removing a Block from the Project Navigator Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block Simulating a Block
Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator

Delete a block from the Project Navigator by deleting it from the Project Navigators Blocks list. If the block exists in the hierarchy, any component symbol that pointed to the block you just deleted becomes a black box. Note This does not remove the block from the local symbols list or from your hard drive. DxDesigner will not allow you to create a new block with the same name as the one you deleted until you delete the original block from the list of local symbols.
Procedure
1. Select the block you want to delete in the Project Navigators Blocks list. 2. Delete with Edit > Delete.
Related Topics
Blocks
o o o o o o
Creating a Block Building Hierarchical Designs Removing a Block from the Project Navigator Deleting a Block from the Project Navigator Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block Simulating a Block
Schematics
A schematic is a block of design data that you can view and edit graphically. A schematic can contain multiple sheets in a flat design or blocks of other schematics and spreadsheets in a hierarchical design.
65
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Schematics
Procedures
Creating a Schematic Building a Schematic Specifying the Characteristics of Components
Related Topics
o o o o o o o o
Creating a Schematic
Create a schematic block when you want to capture a schematic graphically. You can create a schematic two ways: by creating a schematic directly in the Project Navigators Blocks list, and by creating a schematic as a new layer of hierarchy under an existing block.
Procedure
Create a schematic directly in the Project Navigators Blocks list with File > New > Schematic. Create a schematic as a new layer of hierarchy under an existing block as follows: a. Open the schematic or spreadsheet that contains the block. b. Right-click the blocks symbol and click Push Schematic. A new schematic opens in the schematic editor window, and a schematic appears in the Project Navigator both in the hierarchy tree under the block to which it is attached and in the Blocks list.
66
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Sheets
Results
You are ready to populate the schematic.
Related Topics
Schematics
o
Building a Schematic
Sheets
A sheet is a container of schematic components, connectivity, and other elements. A schematic can have multiple sheets making up a flat design. Sheets connect to each other with onsheet and offsheet connections.
Procedures
Re-ordering Sheets in a Design Copying Sheets Adding a Sheet Deleting a Sheet Building a Schematic Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets)
Related Topics
o o o o o o o o
67
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Sheets
Re-ordering Sheets in a Design

Re-order sheets in your design to arrange them as suits your organization. Re-ordering sheets has no impact on the design components or connectivity contained in any re-ordered sheets.
Procedure
1. In the Project Navigator, select a sheet, then drag and drop it to its new position in the order. The sheets will still reflect their original sheet number. 2. Select all the sheets in the design. 3. Right-click > Renumber. DxDesigner renumbers the sheets according to the new sheet order.
Related Topics
Sheets
o o o o
Copying Sheets Adding a Sheet Deleting a Sheet Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets
Copying Sheets
Copy sheets to quickly reproduce a sheet or create a starting point for another sheet with similar components.
Procedure
1. In the Project Navigator, select the sheet you want to copy. 2. Copy with Edit > Copy. 3. Place the cursor in the schematic into which you want to paste the sheet. 4. Paste with Edit > Paste.
Related Topics
Sheets
o o o
Re-ordering Sheets in a Design Adding a Sheet Deleting a Sheet
68
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Sheets o o
Building a Schematic Connecting Components in a Schematic
Adding a Sheet
Add a sheet to extend the scope of a schematic. You can add a sheet in two ways: from the menu and from the last sheet in the schematic.
Procedure
Create a sheet from the menu as follows: a. Open the schematic to which you want to add the sheet. b. Add a sheet with File > New > Sheet. A sheet appears under the selected schematic numbered one more than the last sheet in the list. Create a sheet from the last sheet in the list: a. From the Project Navigator, double-click the last sheet in the level where you want to add a new sheet. b. With the cursor in the newly-opened schematic window, do one of the following: Press Page Down. Select View > Next Sheet
c. When asked if you want a new sheet added, click Yes.
Related Topics
Sheets
o o o
Re-ordering Sheets in a Design Copying Sheets Deleting a Sheet
Deleting a Sheet
Delete a sheet to remove it from the schematic and from the database.
Procedure
1. In the Project Navigator, position the cursor over the schematic name you wish to delete. 2. Delete with Edit > Delete.
69
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Symbols
Related Topics
Sheets
o o o
Re-ordering Sheets in a Design Copying Sheets Adding a Sheet
Symbols
In the Netlist workflow, you create and edit symbols with DxLibrary Studio. You store these symbols in ASCII libraries located anywhere that is accessible by DxDesigner. You configure DxDesigner to point to these libraries using Setup > Settings > Boards (category) > Symbol Libraries (subcategory).
Requirement
In order for a symbol to be recognized by the netlister it must have at least the following: At least one explicit pin. A DEVICE property A PKG_TYPE property.
Procedures
Creating a Local Symbol Editing a Local Symbol Adding Symbols to a Schematic Adding Components to an ICT Block
Related Topics
Adding Symbols to a Schematic The Project Navigator DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
o o o o
Projects Boards Blocks Schematics
70
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Symbols o o o o
Sheets Spreadsheets (ICT Designs) Symbols Nets
Creating a Local Symbol

You can create the following types of local symbols: Table 2-2. Local Symbol Types Symbol Type Module Composite Pin Annotate Description Does not have an underlying schematic. Represents a base function or physical part in the design. Appears as a leaf cell in the Navigator. Has an underlying schematic. Implements the underlying schematic function at a higher level of the design. This is also called a block. A port or interface on the schematic (for example, IN, OUT, or BI built-in symbols). You also use pin symbols to tie a net to a global symbol. A graphic or annotation that has no electrical or connectivity information
Procedure
1. Select File > New > Local Symbol. The Symbol Editor opens. 2. With the drawing tools, create the symbol graphic. 3. For Pin0, which appears by default, specify the Name, Direction, Side, and Pin Number parameters, and then click Enter. An asterisk appears in the left-hand column, indicating that the pin is unplaced. 4. Create additional pins by clicking below existing rows to add new rows. 5. Place pins by selecting the row and dragging it onto the symbol graphic. As you drag the row, it become a graphic of a pin, for easy placement. Note: After you placed a pin, the asterisk for the corresponding row disappears. 6. In the Properties window, do the following: Enter the symbol name. Select a symbol type from the list. Leave the Forward PCB value at default (True). Add any other properties from the <new property> list.
71
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Nets
7. When you are finished, save the symbol.
Result
The local symbol appears in the [Local Symbols] section in the DxDataBook window, the CL View tab. You can add it to the design as you would any other symbol.
Related Topics
Symbols
o o o
Editing a Local Symbol Adding Symbols to a Schematic Adding Components to an ICT Block
Editing a Local Symbol

You can edit a local symbol from within DxDesigner.
Procedure
1. In the Schematic Window or the Project Navigator Tree, select the symbol. 2. Open the Symbol Editor with File > Edit Local Symbol. 3. Edit the symbol. 4. Save and close the Symbol Editor when you are finished.
Related Topics
Symbols
o o o
Creating a Local Symbol Adding Symbols to a Schematic Adding Components to an ICT Block
Nets
Nets provide connectivity between pins of components. Nets can be either simple nets, buses, or differential pairs. Nets: A single net connects a pin of one component to either another net or the pin of another component.
72
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Ports
Buses: A bus is an array of nets represented by a single line in a schematic or by a single expandable row in a spreadsheet. In a schematic, any number of signal pins can converge into a single bus that can then traverse a design until it expands again into its constituent nets that then connect with individual pins. Differential Pair: A differential pair is a pair of nets that you want to make sure share interference signals so their relative timing is not impaired
Procedures
Connecting Components in a Schematic Adding Connectivity to Components in an ICT Block
Related Topics
o o o o o o o
Projects Boards Blocks Schematics Sheets Spreadsheets (ICT Designs) Symbols
Ports
Ports create connectivity from an underlying schematic to a higher-level block in a hierarchical design.This applies to both top-down and bottom-up methodologies. Each port on a schematic corresponds to a pin on the higher-level block. Ports must not appear on the top-level schematic in a design, because there is no higherlevel block to connect to. You can add ports to a design either automatically or manually, depending on your methodology and design architecture.
Procedures
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down
73
DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects Ports
Related Topics
Building Hierarchical Designs
o o
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up
74
Chapter 3 Building a Schematic

You create and edit designs in graphical blocks called schematics. A schematic is one of two types of blocks you can create in DxDesigner, the other being an Interconnectivity Table (ICT). Schematics are represented in the Navigator window project structure with the icon. A schematic is a graphical representation of a design. It consists of two types of objects. Active and passive. Active objects, such as components, nets, and buses, have electrical or logical meaning, and are passed to layout. Passive objects, such as text, circles, and other shapes, are graphical only. They are not passed to layout, but may be used to draw local symbols or to document the design. The basic process of creating a schematic design, is to add sheets to the design, add components, connect the components, and add properties. You can also add net constraints and build hierarchy, if needed. You can also work within the schematic to move and reorient objects, change views, and do other editing tasks.
Prerequisites
You have created or opened a DxDesigner project. See Creating a Project and Opening a Project. You have created a schematic. See Creating a Schematic
Procedures
Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets Adding Symbols to a Schematic Connecting Components in a Schematic Adding and Editing Properties Building Hierarchical Designs
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
75
Building a Schematic Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets
Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets

A schematic must have a least one sheet. You create the first sheet after you create a project. You can define sheet characteristics such as default size and default borders, You can add, delete, rename and renumber sheets. and you can connect sheets in either a flat or hierarchical design.
Procedures
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics Adding a Sheet Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets Deleting a Sheet Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator Copying a Schematic Sheet to Another Project Re-ordering Sheets in a Design
Related Topics
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics

By default, new sheets in DxDesigner open with default project settings. You can change the default project setting, and you can configure borders using the following procedures.
Procedures
Preparing Project Settings Framing Schematic Sheets with Borders Partitioning a Sheet into Zones
Related Topics
New Sheets - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. Setting Annotations for Link Symbols on a Sheet Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets
o o
Adding a Sheet Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets
76
Building a Schematic Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets o o o o
Deleting a Sheet Renaming a Selected Object from the Navigator Copying a Schematic Sheet to Another Project Re-ordering Sheets in a Design
Framing Schematic Sheets with Borders

You use borders to display corporate and custom information on your schematics, such as company name and logo, project name, creation or revision dates, and sheet numbers. You can also specify borders for each sheet size that your company uses.
Prerequisites
Create or locate border symbols for each sheet size you will be using in your project(s). Save the border configuration for your project or group of projects. The border configuration is stored in a borders.ini file. You can place the borders.ini file in a location visible to multiple users, such as a local project or a working directory. Configure a project to use selected borders for each sheet size you will be using, both for the first sheet in a design and for subsequent sheets.
Once you have a set of border symbols and have set up your project with a border configuration, you are ready to add a border to your schematic sheet.
Procedures
Creating a Sheet Border Symbol Specifying Border Configuration File Location Changing a Border Configuration Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic Border Properties
Related Topic
77
Creating a Sheet Border Symbol

A sheet border is a specialized type of symbol. Therefore, to build a sheet border, you build a symbol. You can treat a border like any symbol, by assigning properties to it, and placing it on a schematic.
Procedure - Netlist Workflow Only

Follow the procedures for Creating or Editing a Symbol in the Managing Parts Databases with DxLibraryStudio manual. Also see Creating a Border Symbol in the DxDesigner Symbol Editor manual.
Related Topics
o o o o
Specifying Border Configuration File Location Changing a Border Configuration Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic Border Properties
Specifying Border Configuration File Location

The border configuration is the assignment of a particular border symbol to each of the sheet sizes that you will use in DxDesigner. (See Changing a Border Configuration on page 80.) Configuration information for your borders is stored in a file named borders.ini. An example of a borders.ini is shipped in the standard directory of your DxDesigner installation. You can control the scope of your border configuration, making it available to your projects in either of two ways: Place borders.ini in a location that is visible to multiple users/projects. Place borders.ini in a location that is limited to one user (such as WDIR) or to a local project (in the project directory).
Procedure
To save and point your project to a particular borders.ini file: 1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category). 2. In the Border Symbols field (shown in Figure 3-1) enter a path to the borders.ini file as described at the bottom of the figure:
78
Figure 3-1. Specifying Which borders.ini File to Use for Border Configurations
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating a Sheet Border Symbol Changing a Border Configuration Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic Border Properties
79
Changing a Border Configuration

This topic describes how you can create or change the current border symbol configuration for a particular sheet size referenced by a project.
Prerequisite
Before you change a border configuration for your project, you should have specified where the configuration is stored (where the borders.ini file is located). See Specifying Border Configuration File Location on page 78.
Procedure
To change the border symbol(s) associated with a particular sheet type: (refer to Figure 3-2) 1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory). The Borders and Zones subcategory of the Settings dialog lists the possible sheet types (sizes) that can be used in your project. 2. If you do not want to use the default settings assigned to each sheet type, select (leftclick) the sheet type you wish to re-assign with a different border symbol. 3. Note that the current symbol for the first and next sheet are displayed. 4. Click the Change button. The Border Symbol dialog appears. 5. In the Border Symbol dialog, navigate to the desired symbol you want to use and select it (left-click). 6. Click OK. The border symbol that was listed (see step 3) changes to the new value. The new value is recorded in the borders.ini file you specified earlier. (Note: if you did not specify a borders.ini file in Setup > Settings > Project (category), your setting(s) will be ignored.) 7. Repeat the previous step for all sheet sizes (first sheet and next sheet) as needed.
80
Figure 3-2. Changing a Border Configuration for a Project
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating a Sheet Border Symbol Specifying Border Configuration File Location Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic Border Properties
Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic

Prerequisite
Before you can add borders to a schematic sheet, you first must create and configure the sheet borders.
Procedures
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic Border Properties Controlling Sheet Borders on a Schematic
81
Border Properties
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating a Sheet Border Symbol Specifying Border Configuration File Location Changing a Border Configuration Border Properties
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic

Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > New Sheets (subcategory). 2. In the Border Sheet Options section, check the option Automatically add border to new schematic sheets.
Related Topics
o o o
Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic Deleting a Border from a Schematic Changing an Existing Border
Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic

Procedure
In the Schematic window, (right-click) > Insert Border.
Related Topics
o o o
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic Deleting a Border from a Schematic Changing an Existing Border
82
Deleting a Border from a Schematic

Procedure
In the Schematic window, (right-click) > Delete Border.
Related Topics
o o o
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic Changing an Existing Border
Changing an Existing Border

Procedure
1. In the Schematic window, (right-click) > Change Border. The Border Symbol window appears. 2. Navigate to the partition that holds the border symbol you want. 3. Select the desired symbol and click OK. Use care to pick a proper symbol for your current sheet size.
Related Topics
o o o
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic Deleting a Border from a Schematic
Border Properties
When creating border symbols, the Librarian may assign properties as required by your company. These properties are commonly used for annotation of the design.You can change these properties and propagate those changes to either the entire project, a selected design level, a selected schematic level, or a selected sheet level.
Parameterized Properties
A parameterized property is a special type of border property that has a variable value. When the sheets are printed, the properties are evaluated and the results are printed. The following
83
parameterized properties are supported. For more information, see the DxDesigner Properties Glossary. @DATETIME @NAME @PATH @SHEET @SHEETTOTAL @XYCOORD
Procedures
Changing Border Properties
Related Topics
o o o
Automatically Applying a Sheet Border to Each Schematic Manually Adding a Border to a Schematic Deleting a Border from a Schematic
Changing Border Properties

Prerequisites
You must create user-defined Border properties on the border symbol.
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory). 2. Click the Properties button. The Border Properties dialog appears as shown in Figure 3-3. 3. Change a property value(s) as desired. 4. Click OK in the Border Properties dialog, followed by OK in the Settings dialog. Your change did not yet take effect in the project, but did get saved to the Border Symbols file that is specified in Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Border Symbols (field). 5. In step 8 you must specify the range (scope) for this property change to take effect. Open a sheet within the desired range. For descriptions of the different ranges, see Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
84
6. Select Tools > Update Other Objects. The Update Other Objects dialog box appears. 7. Select Properties as the type. 8. Choose the range for this property change to take affect based on what you chose in step 5. 9. Click OK. The property definitions stored in the active borders.ini file takes affect in the chosen scope. Figure 3-3. Changing Border Properties
Related Topics
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones

You partition sheets into horizontal and vertical zones to annotate location information to link symbols in your schematic design (link symbols are symbols specified as special component links). Use this information to locate annotated link symbols across multiple sheets in a Cross Reference summary report.
85
DxDesigner calculates zone sizes and the location of each link symbol within a zone (see Figure 3-4) based on your settings in Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory). Sheet boundary zones are comprised of numbers and positions, and are calculated using the following criteria: The sheet border area provides the left-bottom and top-right corners that serve as boundaries for the zone calculations (based on the sheet size setting). The horizontal and vertical zone offset is added to the bottom, left zone area coordinates and subtracted from the top, right zone area coordinates. Note: You can specify a horizontal and vertical zone with negative offsets that are larger than the sheet. The zones are calculated by dividing the zone area horizontal (width) and vertical (height) dimensions by the total number of zones. Figure 3-4. Sheet Boundary and Zone with Offsets Sheet Boundary Area Horizontal Top Offset Vertical Zone Area Left Offset Horizontal Bottom Offset Right Offset
Vertical
Prerequisite
Set the sheet and border sheet options (see New Sheets - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual).
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner window, select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory). See Figure 3-5. 2. In the Borders and Zones section, select a border template (for example, A Landscape). You can also create a custom template: a. Click Add Custom. b. In the New Size dialog box, type the template width and height (in inches) and click OK. The custom template is displayed at the bottom of the sheet size template list box.
86
3. [Optional] Click the Change button, specify the border symbol for the first sheet in the Border Symbol dialog box, and click OK (also specify the border symbol for the next sheet). 4. In the Horizontal Zones subsection, specify the following: a. Select whether to use Letters (A,B,C,...) or Numbers (1,2,3,...) to define the horizontal zone names (default - Numbers). b. Enter the number of horizontal zones (default is 10 zones). c. [Optional] Enter the horizontal zone offset for both the Top and the Bottom (default is 0.0 inches). d. [Optional] Check the Descending box to display the horizontal zones in descending order. 5. In the Vertical Zones subsection, specify the vertical zone settings, including the Left and Right offsets (see Step 4 for similar considerations). 6. Click OK. Note Make sure that the horizontal and vertical zones you specified map correctly to the sheet border. For more information, see Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol. Figure 3-5. Setting Zone Partitions for a Sheet
87
Results
DxDesigner partitions the sheet into zones and location information is annotated to all of the link symbols. Note The zone settings are stored in the borders.ini file (see Specifying Border Configuration File Location).
Related Topics
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics Setting Annotations for Link Symbols on a Sheet Updating Link Symbols Adding a Special Component to a Schematic Partitioning a Sheet into Zones
o o
Displaying Sheet Border Zones Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol
Displaying Sheet Border Zones

Display the following types of zones on your sheet: Border zones, grid zones, or the sheet zoning grid.
Prerequisite
Create horizontal and vertical zones (see Partitioning a Sheet into Zones)
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner window, select Setup > Settings > Display (category). 2. In the Display section, check the following zone display option boxes (boxes are unchecked by default): Zoning Grid to display zone grid lines on the sheet. Zone Labels subsection:
o o
Border to display zone names (for example, A, B, ...) on the sheet border. Left-Top Corner of Each Zone to display the zone names (for example, A1) in the top-left corner of each zone on the sheet border.
3. Click OK.
88
Results
The schematic sheet contains zone grid lines, the sheet border contains horizontal and vertical zone names, and a zone name is displayed in the top left-hand corner of each zone on the sheet border.
Related Topics
o
Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol
Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol

When a sheet in your design contains a border symbol that does not match the current zone settings, the link annotations may not correspond to the zones defined by the border symbol. This topic describes how to set the horizontal and vertical zones to match an existing sheet border symbol.
Prerequisites
Enable the Zoning Grid and Zone Label > Border options by selecting Setup > Settings > Display (category) Choose a sheet border type by selecting Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory)
Procedure
1. Count the total number of horizontal and vertical zones located on your sheet border and note these values for use later. 2. Determine the horizontal Top and Bottom offsets and vertical Left and Right offsets from the sheet boundary as follows: a. Place your cursor on the lower-left corner edge of the sheet border to find the Vertical-Left offset and the Horizontal-Bottom offset for the vertical zone placement on the sheet (see Figure 3-6). Note these values at the bottom of the DxDesigner status bar for later use. b. Place your cursor on the upper-right corner edge of the sheet boundary and note the values at the bottom of the DxDesigner status bar (see Figure 3-6). These values will be the upper values determined by your sheet size. For example, if your sheet is a DPortrait, 34.000, 22.000 in will appear at the bottom DxDesigner status bar. c. Move the cursor down and left to the upper-right corner edge of the sheet border as shown in Figure 3-6. Note these values from the bottom of the DxDesigner status bar.
89
d. To find the Vertical-Right offset and the Horizontal-Top offset for the zone placement on the sheet, subtract the values as shown in Figure 3-6. Note these computed values. NOTE: If your border symbol is centered in the schematic window, then you can use the same value for both Horizontal Top and Bottom offsets, and the same value for the Vertical Left and Right offsets as indicated by the example in Figure 3-6. If your border symbol is not centered in the schematic window, you must check the offsets at opposite corners of the border symbol to determine the proper Top/Bottom and Left/Right offset values. Figure 3-6. Horizontal (Top/Bottom) - Vertical (Left/Right) Sheet Border Offset
3. Select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Borders and Zones (subcategory). 4. In the Borders and Zones window, select the appropriate sheet type. The example shown in Figure 3-7 continues with the the D Landscape sheet type used in Figure 3-6. 5. In the Horizontal Zones section, enter the number of zones and the horizontal Left and Right offsets you noted earlier. The example shown in Figure 3-7 uses numbers for the 8 horizontal zones and the Left and Right offsets are 0.5 inches. In addition, the Descending box is checked to indicate that the numbers decrease from left-to-right. 6. In the Vertical Zones section, enter the number of zones and the vertical Bottom and Top offsets you noted earlier. The example shown in Figure 3-7 uses letters for the 4 vertical zones and the Left and Right offsets are 1.0 inches.
90
Figure 3-7. Horizontal and Vertical Zone Settings
7. Click OK.
Results
The horizontal and vertical zones are aligned with the sheet border edge.
Related Topics
o
Displaying Sheet Border Zones
Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets

Use dynamic links to view objects across multiple sheets in a flat schematic design. You can also use dynamics links in a design saved to PDF file format (see Generating a PDF of Your Design). Note Dynamic onsheet/offsheet links replaced onsheet/offsheet connectors in the EE 7.9 release (specify links instead of connectors as special components).
Prerequisites
Define your dynamic link symbols (see Adding a Special Component to a Schematic). Add a name to the Annotate (Link) symbol in the Properties window (see Properties Window Overview in the DxDesigner Symbol Editor). The name specified for the Link symbol does not affect design connectivity since it continues to be controlled through the net name. The Link symbol name dynamically links associated Link symbols with the same name within the flat schematic.
91
Tip: To automatically synchronize net names to onsheet and offsheet links, use the Automatically Propagate net names to on-sheet/off-sheet links option (see Automatically Propagating Net Names to Onsheet/Offsheet Links).
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner Schematic window, press Alt and left-click on a link (for example, a net). The mouse cursor appears as a finger icon. Result: DxDesigner automatically jumps to the next link in the schematic sheet. Note: For Linux/Solaris users, press Ctrl + Alt and left-click on a link to jump to the next link. 2. Press Alt and left-click on each link to serially move through all of the links in the design. You can also Right-click > Jump To and select a link from a list of target links. To map library symbols to dynamic links, select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Special Components (subcategory) > Link. In addition to onsheet/offsheet links, you can add any number of symbols as special component links. Tip: To zoom in on the link, select the Fit Selected button or Setup > Settings > Cross Probing (category) > Zoom Fit to Selected objects to automatically run the Fit Selected command when moving between dynamic links.
Related Topics
o o
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics Framing Schematic Sheets with Borders
Placing an Onsheet/Offsheet Link on a Net Manually

You can manually place an onsheet/offsheet link on a net in your schematic.
Procedure
1. From the DxDesigner menu, select Add > Special Components > LINKS (or click on the toolbar and select LINKS). 2. Select a link from the list that you want to place on a net (for example, builtin:onsheet.1 or builtin:offsheet.1). 3. DxDesigner automatically attaches the link to your cursor. Drag and drop it on a net in your schematic.
92
Tip: If you have only provided one symbol for the link during setup, the link is automatically attached to the net you right-clicked, and you are in drag mode with the net. If you have provided more than one symbol, a dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select the link symbol that you want to attach. Links that have already been used are indicated in italics. Note Onsheet/offsheet special components are dynamic links which allow you to view objects across multiple schematic sheets (see Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets).
Related Topics
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets Placing an Onsheet/Offsheet Link on a Net Automatically
Placing an Onsheet/Offsheet Link on a Net Automatically

You can automatically place an onsheet/offsheet link on a net that has only one unconnected point.
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner Schematic Window, select the net to which you want to attach the link. 2. From the DxDesigner menu, select Add > Special Components > LINKS (or click on the toolbar and select LINKS). DxDesigner automatically attaches the link to the selected net. Tip: If you have only provided one symbol for the link during setup, the link is automatically attached to the net you right-clicked. If you have provided more than one symbol, a dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select the link symbol that you want to attach. Note Onsheet/offsheet special components are dynamic links which allow you to view objects across multiple schematic sheets (see Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets).
93
Related Topics
Customizing Schematic Sheet Characteristics Creating a Schematic Structure With Sheets Placing an Onsheet/Offsheet Link on a Net Manually
Setting Annotations for Link Symbols on a Sheet

Set the annotation format to be displayed for all link symbols on a sheet (link symbols are symbols specified as special component links).
Procedure
1. In the DxDesigner window, select Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Annotations (subcategory). 2. In the Annotations section, left-click the Annotation Format button link annotation format that you want to display on the sheet. For example: Property: sheet. Property: hzone. Property: vzone. and select the
3. In the Annotation Format for Links text field, $(sheet)-$(hzone)$(vzone) is displayed (default setting). 4. Click OK.
Results
The selected annotation format is displayed for all link symbols on the sheet. For example: 1-8F, where the sheet name is 1, the horizontal zone name is 8, and the vertical zone name is F. Note For any sequence of characters where the sheet, hzone, or vzone name is not part of the annotation format for example, $(page) your corporate engineering standards determine annotation behavior.
Related Topics
94
Building a Schematic Adding Symbols to a Schematic
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones Updating Link Symbols Adding a Special Component to a Schematic
Adding Symbols to a Schematic

Prerequisites
Either open an existing project (see Opening a Project), or create a new one (see Creating a Project). You must specify symbol libraries within your Library Search Order. See Adding Libraries to a Project (Netlist workflow)
Procedures
Adding Symbols from Distributed Libraries (Netlist Workflow) Adding Special Components Creating Component Arrays Splitting a Net or Bus
Related Topics
Symbols Templates that Define Project Settings
Filtering the Symbol List

You filter the symbol list to present only the symbols you are interested in.
Procedure
1. Click Clear Filters to remove previous filter criteria 2. Select a tab. 3. The filter fields correspond to the list columns directly below them. Enter all or part of the information you want to filter on in the appropriate field. For example, if you want to filter for all parts beginning with CC0, type CC0 in the Part field of the Part View tab. Tip: the filter supports * and ? wildcards.
95
Adding Symbols from Distributed Libraries (Netlist Workflow)

Prerequisite
You have specified the locations of your distributed libraries. See Adding Libraries to a Project (Netlist workflow)
Procedure
1. Select View > DxDataBook. 2. Optional Step: On the CL View tab of the DxDataBook window, filter the window for the symbol you want to add. For more information, see Filtering the Symbol List. 3. Select the symbol. The symbol appears in the view window to the right of the DxDataBook window. 4. Do one of the following: To place one symbol, drag the symbol from the view window to the schematic and click where you want to place the symbol. To place multiple instances of the symbol, click the Place Symbol button followed by a click on each location on the schematic where you want that symbol to appear.
Related Topics
Filtering the Symbol List DxDataBook Users Guide
Updating Placed Components to Match Changed Distributed Library Symbols

In the Netlist workflow, DxDesigner symbols are stored in Libraries that are specified in the Library Search Order. All instances of a symbol are taken from these libraries. The symbol stored in one of these libraries is the base symbol. DxDesigner checks symbol instances against their base symbols upon startup, or when you reload a schematic. All instances whose base symbols have changed are highlighted. You can then update the instances with the new symbol definition, or leave them with their present definition. When you are finished updating, the highlights are cleared.
96
Creating Component Arrays

You can use the Array Component Property to create an array from a single component (see Array Component in the DxDesigner Properties Glossary). This is especially useful for saving schematic real estate by representing an array of components in aggregate as a single component.
Procedure
1. Select the component you want to specify as an array of components. For more information, see Selecting Objects. 2. Choose Add Properties from the popup menu. The Add Properties dialog appears. 3. The Type should be set to component, and the Property should be set to Array Component. 4. For the Value, choose a value that reflects the number of components you want the array to represent. 5. Click Apply. Note An array component necessarily has wide pins. That is, in order to connect those pins, they should be wired to buses rather than individual nets. For more information about using buses, see Connecting Components With Buses.
Results
The component is transformed to an array of components as shown in the example in Figure 3-8. By default, the Array Component is visible, with its value displayed, to indicate that the component is, in fact, an array of components. Figure 3-8. Array Component Example
97
Related Topics
Creating Graphical Arrays
Adding Special Components

Special components are relatively simple components such as power and ground or onsheet/offsheet pins that you use frequently, or hierarchical ports, that serve a distinctive purpose.
Prerequisite
You have previously configured Special Components. See Configuring Special Components.
Procedure
1. On the Add toolbar, click the Special Components button from the list (for example, LINKS). and select a component
You can also choose Add > Special Components to select special components (see Add Menu in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for more information about special components). 2. In the DxDesigner Schematic Window, right-click to place the special component on the schematic. If you select a special component that has not been configured, the Settings window appears. Note Onsheet/offsheet special components are dynamic links which allow you to view objects across multiple schematic sheets (see Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets).
Related Topics
Adding Symbols from Distributed Libraries (Netlist Workflow) Creating Component Arrays
98
Connecting Components in a Schematic

Once you place components on a schematic, you can connect them using nets and buses. The method you use to create connections depends on the number of connections you want to make. Use nets to create connections between component pins, from a single component pin to a net or bus, or between nets or buses. A bus is a collection of nets that can operate as a group. Use buses to create connections between component bus pins, or from a component bus pin to a single pin.
Note: After connecting a component you may wish to disconnect and move it. To disconnect a component while leaving nets in place, select each attached net, then Right-Click > Disconnect.
Prerequisite
You have set your preferences for nets and buses. See Setting Net and Bus Preferences
Procedures
Setting Net and Bus Preferences Connecting Components with Nets Connecting Components With Buses Connecting Components with Differential Pairs Editing Connectivity
Related Topics
Deleting a Net Global Nets Nets Nets - Schematic Editor - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Setting Net and Bus Preferences

Before you create connections, set your preferences for net and bus routing and display.
99
Procedures
Setting the Routing Mode for Nets and Buses Setting Default Display Characteristics for Nets and Buses Overriding the Default Width for Selected Nets and Buses Setting the Bus Dot Width Naming a Net or Bus with an Automatically Generated Name Naming a Net or Bus Manually
Related Topic
Setting the Routing Mode for Nets and Buses

All connectivity is formed in DxDesigner with the specification of a routing mode. You construct a net or a bus under a specified routing mode that assists with determining the optimal route path. The following procedure shows how to set or change the routing mode for a project.
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Nets (subcategory) or click the Route Mode button . 2. In the Route Mode options section, select one of the following modes: Straight Straight routing specifies a straight connection between two points. This as is form of routing can overlap or pass through components and existing connections. Any incidental crossing of nets from straight routing does not imply a connection, and does not create a solder dot. Orthogonal Orthogonal routing begins with a horizontal or vertical orientation depending on the point of origin as follows:
o
From a joint begins in a horizontal or vertical direction following the cursor movement (left or right, horizontal up or down, vertical) From a pin automatically begins in a horizontal or vertical direction, depending on the orientation of the pin From a point on a net or bus segment begins in a direction perpendicular to the orientation of the segment
100
Note: Orthogonal routing does not allow a connection to pass through a component. Avoidance Avoidance routing specifies an automatic connection between two points that avoids components. Specifying intermediary points along the connection creates a more distinct specification of the path of the connection. The distance between components and the connection is the avoidance distance. DxDesigner automatically staggers a connection by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the components or other connections.
Related Topics
Setting Net and Bus Preferences Nets Nets - Schematic Editor - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Setting Default Display Characteristics for Nets and Buses

Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Display (category) > Objects (subcategory). 2. In the Object column, locate the Net type in the list. 3. For net Color, Fill Style and Line Style, click in the box and use the pulldown list to choose a value. 4. The Width column controls the displayed thickness of the net on the schematic. Enter a value from 1 to 10. 5. Click OK.
Result
These settings will be the default display characteristics for all nets. Note: You can override net width defaults on a net-by-net basis. See Overriding the Default Width for Selected Nets and Buses.
Related Topics
101
Overriding the Default Width for Selected Nets and Buses

You can override the default width setting for individual nets and buses. When you add new nets or buses, they return to the default width.
Procedure
1. Double click the net or bus to select it and open the Properties window. 2. In the Properties window, locate the Line Width property. 3. Click the Value box. A pulldown list appears. 4. Choose the desired line thickness value (1 - 10) from the pulldown list to specify the net width for the selected net.
Related Topics
Connecting Components with Nets Setting Net and Bus Preferences
Setting the Bus Dot Width

Prerequisite
Set the desired units from Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) as one of: millimeters, centimeters, or inches.
Procedure
Select Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Bus Dot Width (option).
Related Topic
Connecting Components with Nets

A net carries a signal, and represents an electrical connection. You can construct a net with one or more segments. If a net has more than one segment, DxDesigner indicates the segment endpoints by joints at the net vertices. Intersecting nets are indicated by dots. You can configure dot size when you set up DxDesigner preferences. In addition to connecting two components, you can draw a net that is connected at one end, or not connected at all. A net connected at one end is called a dangling net.
102
Note: In DxDesigner, nets and lines are not the same. While nets represent physical traces on a PCB, lines are graphical only.
Procedures
Setting Net and Bus Preferences Adding a Net Naming a Net or Bus Renaming a Net Deleting a Net Connecting Nets to Power/Ground Merging Nets Splitting a Net or Bus
Related Topics
Global Nets Types of Net Connections Connecting Components in a Schematic
o o
Connecting Components with Nets Connecting Components With Buses
Adding Nets to ICT Components
Adding a Net
Procedure
1. Select Add > Net or click from the object toolbar or type net on the command line. 2. Click the left mouse button at the origin point of the net. Note: By default, nets do not need to begin at a component pin or at an existing net. To change this default, select Setup > Settings > Advanced (category), and then clear the Begin Nets in Space checkbox. 3. Drag the mouse to form the net. You can specify vertices (intersections of net segments) along the net by clicking the space bar while dragging. The current routing mode determines how the connection is formed. 4. Release the left mouse button to specify an end point for the net. Note: once you have added the net, the next step is to name it. See Naming a Net or Bus.
103
Related Topics
o o o o o
Deleting a Net Renaming a Net Global Nets Merging Nets Splitting a Net or Bus
Connecting Components With Buses
Naming a Net or Bus

You can choose between two methods to name a bus or net; automatically or manually. To save design time you can configure DxDesigner to name nets or buses automatically, based on rules shown in Net and Bus Naming Rules. You can name nets and buses manually when, for example, you want to control the naming more tightly than the naming rules permit.
Procedures
Naming a Net or Bus with an Automatically Generated Name Naming a Net or Bus Manually
Related Topics
Connecting Components with Nets Adding and Editing Properties Name Characteristics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Net and Bus Naming Rules

Except in the case of dangling nets or buses, names are based on the component and component pin to which the net is connected. In the case of dangling nets or buses, names are based on the component from which the bus originates. Names are based on Reference Designators, if they appear on the component. Before assigning the name, DxDesigner removes all special characters from the Reference Designator, or replaces them with underscores.
104
The automatic naming rules for nets and buses may generate more than one name. One of these names is automatically applied to the net, but you can also select another autogenerated name in the Properties window, from the Value pulldown of the Name property.
Procedures
Naming a Net or Bus with an Automatically Generated Name
Related Topics
Naming a Net or Bus Manually Connecting Components with Nets Connecting Components With Buses
Naming a Net or Bus with an Automatically Generated Name

Procedure
Select Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Nets (subcategory), and then set the Name New Nets Automatically and/or Name New Buses Automatically checkboxes. Optional: You can also toggle the Name New Nets Automatically feature on and off by clicking the associated toolbar button (if installed on the toolbar) . When this feature is active (on), the button is bordered by a box . To get the toolbar button, use View > Toolbars > Customize > Commands (tab) > View (category) and drag the icon to your toolbar.
Result
When you create a net or bus, DxDesigner assigns an automatically-generated net or bus name according to the rules described in Net and Bus Naming Rules.
Notes
DxDesigner may generate more than one name for a net or bus. One of these names is automatically applied to the net, or you can replace the name assigned to the net or bus with one of these alternate names by doing the following: a. Double-click the net or bus to open the Properties Window. b. Open the Value pulldown of the Name property. c. Select a name from the portion of the list that appears above the empty separator row
105
To make a net name visible on the schematic, select the checkbox next to the Name column in the Properties window,
Related Topics
Connecting Components in a Schematic Connecting Components with Nets Naming a Net or Bus Manually Name Characteristics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Naming a Net or Bus Manually

Prerequisite
Confirm that Name New Nets Automatically and/or Name New Buses Automatically are disabled. Select Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Nets (subcategory), and then clear the Name New Nets Automatically and/or Name New Buses Automatically checkboxes. Optional: To clear the Name New Nets Automatically feature, you can toggle the associated toolbar button from to .
Procedure
1. Double-click the net or bus you want to name. This opens the Properties window. 2. Do one of the following: Specify a a new name for the net or bus by clicking the Value column of the Name property and entering the new name. If you are naming a bus, the name must take the form: NAME[LSB:MSB] or NAME[MSB:LSB], where LSB is the least significant bit of the bus and MSB is the most significant bit. Open the Value pulldown and elect an existing name from the list
o
Any previously auto-generated names appear on the pulldown list, above the empty divider row. Existing manually-assigned net names appear on the pulldown list below the empty divider row.
Note: To make the net name visible on the schematic, select the checkbox next to the Name column,
Related Topics
106
Connecting Components With Buses Naming a Net or Bus with an Automatically Generated Name Name Characteristics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Deleting a Net
Procedure
Select the net you want to delete and press <Delete>.
o
If the net you want to delete has more than one segment, do one of the following press <Ctrl> + select the segments you want to delete, then press <Delete>. Drag-Select all the segments then press <Delete>. Select and delete segments individually.
Related Topic
Renaming a Net
Procedure
1. Double-click the net. 2. In the Properties Editor, enter the new name.
Related Topic
Global Nets
Global nets establish connectivity throughout a project. They are most frequently used for power and ground, but they can also be used for global clock signals. When you attach a net to a special component that contains the Global Signal Name property, it inherits its name from the Global Signal Name property value. When a global net inherits the name from the attached Global TAP Symbol, the Properties window displays: The Name field Value in italic font.
107
This field cannot be edited. If you attempt to edit the field, it reverts to the Global Signal Name property value (only happens for nets connected directly to the Global Signal Symbol). To change the global net name, you must edit the Global Signal Property of the TAP symbol. To edit TAP symbols, select Setup > Settings > Project > Special Components. Once defined in the Special Components dialog box, the TAP symbols are also available from the DxDesigner Add toolbar > Special Components button (POWER and GROUND menu items). The net name inherited from the symbol (including a Net is global message) is displayed at the bottom of the Properties window. Note TAP symbols, stored in the symbol libraries, have a Symbol Type property value of PIN and a Global Signal Name property that specifies the value of the global signal. Warning If you connect a Special Component that contains the Global Signal Name property to a non-global net, DxDesigner issues a warning message. If you make the connection anyway, DxDesigner renames the local net with the Global Signal Name value.
Rule
DxDesigner and CES will treat it as a power net even if it is not connected to a power symbol under the following conditions: You assign one of the following names to the net.
o o o o o o o o o
0.9V +/- 5V +/- 12V GND GROUND VCC VDD VEE VSS
The pin count for the net exceeds the threshold you configured in CES. See Specifying Design Preferences in the Constraint Editor System (CES) Users Manual.
108
Related Topic
Connecting Nets to Power/Ground

You use Special Components to connect nets to power or ground. These special components use the property Pin Type values of POWER and GROUND respectively. For more information on this property type, refer to Pin Type in the Properties Glossary Manual. The Pin Type property is used by DxDesigner in general such as when using the Add Missing Ports command and by Verify (the design rules checker) in particular. Power/Ground Pin Type values do not identify Global Nets. Global nets are defined by the value of the Global Signal Name property also placed on the power/ground symbols. You can most often assume that the pins carrying a Power/Ground Pin Type property value will be connected to a Global Net, or to a net carrying the Power Supply Net property or to a net listed in the power_nets/ground_nets in VerifyDefault.ini file. Power/Ground Pin Type properties are used by Verify with Design Rules Check drc-508, drc510, drc-511, drc-601, drc-606. See DRC - Rules Tab in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for an overview of the checks, and links to the specific groups of checks.
Prerequisite
You must specify the power and ground components by selecting Setup > Settings > Project > Special Components. For more information, see Configuring Special Components.
Procedure
1. Select Add > Special Components >Power or Add > Special Components >Ground. 2. If you have configured more than one symbol for power or ground, an additional menu appears that lists them. Select the symbol you want from the this list. 3. Click in the schematic where you want to place the symbol for the global net. (You can click multiple times to place multiple instantiations of the symbol.) 4. Right-click to return the cursor to a pointer. 5. In the Properties window, click in the cell to the right of Global Signal Name and enter the value for the Global Signal Name. By default, the Power symbol value is VCC, and the Ground symbol is GND.
Related Topic
109

A bus is a collection of nets that can operate as a group. Create buses anywhere on a schematic, between component bus pins, or from a single component bus pin. You specify bus names and ranges (widths) using the Name property. When a bus is connected to a bus pin on a component, the signals in the bus are mapped to the signals on the pin by position. The leftmost signal of a bus is connected to the leftmost signal on the pin, and so on, in a one-to-one correspondence. If the bus sizes are different, the right-most signals are left unconnected. For example, if you connect a bus A[2:0] to a component pin B[1:0], the assignment would be as follows: Table 3-1. Bus Signal Assignments Example Bus A[2:0] A[2] A[1] A[0] Component Pin B[1:0] B[1] B[0] unconnected
Prerequisite
You must choose a bus net name delimiter from Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Net Name (subcategory) to be one of the following: None - for example QDATA0, Round Brackets ( ) - for example QDATA(0) Square Brackets [ ] - for example QDATA[0]
Procedures
Adding a Bus Ripping Nets from a Bus Editing Ripped Nets Changing/Updating the Net Name Delimiter
Related Topics
Connecting Components in a Schematic Connecting Components with Nets
110
Adding a Bus
Procedure
1. Select the Bus tool by selecting Add > Bus or clicking the button. 2. Place the cursor in the schematic at the point you have selected as the beginning point for the bus. 3. Press-and-hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to draw the bus as desired. You can add multiple extensions from the bus by click-and-holding the mouse button and moving the mouse away from the bus. You can change the direction of the bus as you draw it by depressing the space bar while dragging. 4. If the Properties window is not open, double-click on the bus to open up the Properties window. 5. Click in the cell to the right of the Name property, shown in the figure below. 6. Either enter a name for the bus, or select a bus name from the dropdown list of buses and bus contents that already exist in the project. (For more information on using predefined bus contents, see Defining Bus Contents.) The name of the bus must include the width of the bus as two numbers separated by a colon, inside square brackets. For example, L1_CADOUT_N[15:0].
Note While the supported bus syntax calls for square brackets, you can use parentheses ( ), or braces { }. Parentheses and braces are automatically converted to square brackets.
Related Topics
Connecting Components in a Schematic Connecting Components With Buses Ripping Nets from a Bus Editing Ripped Nets
111
Ripping Nets from a Bus

Once a bus has been created, DxDesigner provides different methods to rip individual or groups of nets from the bus: All methods automatically add rippers and net names.
Prerequisite
If you plan to use a customized ripper graphic instead of the default, see Setting a Project to Use a Customized Ripper Graphic.
Rule
By default, the Rip Nets command creates nets that are: To the right of a vertical bus Below a horizontal bus You can change these orientations by editing the ripped nets. See Editing Ripped Nets
Procedures
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order Ripping Nets Automatically With the Rip Nets Command Editing Ripped Nets
If you select the Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Show Bit Number (option), the bit number of the net being ripped is displayed. Further, if you select the Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Display Full Signal Name on Ripper (option), the bit designation appears with the full bus name as well as the bit number. Regardless of the method you use to rip nets off a bus, DxDesigner names the individual ripped nets using the nomenclature that you set in Setup > Settings > Projects (category) > Net Name Delimiter (subcategory). This method of name delimiting can prevent confusion in situations such as the inability to distinguish between signal A10 (bit 10 of bus A) and signal A10 (bit 0 of bus A1). Also see Changing/Updating the Net Name Delimiter.
112
For example, if you have 2 buses named A[0:1] and A1[0:1]. The following table shows how the ripped nets would be named, according to the settings specified with the net name delimiter. Table 3-2. Ripped net nomenclature Delimiter None [] () A[0:1] A0 A1 A[0] A[1] A(0) A(1) A1[0:1] A10 A11 A1[0] A1[1] A1(0) A1(1)
Note Use care when assigning net name delimiters. If you copy a schematic from a migrated project to another project with different delimiter settings, it may cause some nets to become disconnected and may cause other, unintentional connections. For example, suppose you have a project with no delimiter for ripped nets and that project includes a bus A[7:0]. In this case, the constituent signals of the bus are named A7...A0. If you then copy a schematic sheet from that project to another project that has a ripped net delimiter set, the constituent signals are not automatically renamed with brackets. That is, their names remain A7...A0.
Related Topics
Ripper Symbols Connecting Components in a Schematic Connecting Components With Buses
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually

Procedure
1. Select Add > Net or click the button. 2. Position the cursor over the start position on the bus where you want to rip a net. 3. Click-and-hold the left mouse button while moving the cursor away from the bus to rip a net. By default, the net name will correspond to the first element of the bus.
113
If you want to change the individual net, click the Change Bus Signal icon that appears when you place the net.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to rip as many nets as you need. By default, each time you rip a new net the net name increments to the next element in the bus until all bus elements are covered, at which point the sequencing starts over. For example, a bus named DATA[0:7] would rip nets in the order of DATA(0), DATA(1)..., DATA(7), DATA(0)... A bus named DATA[7:0] would rip nets DATA(7), DATA(6)..., DATA(0), DATA(7)...
Related Topics
o
Ripper Symbols
Editing Ripped Nets Connecting Components With Buses
Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order

This procedure uses and example of assuming a bus ADDRESS(0:15). If you only want to rip the odd upper bits 7, 9, 11, 13 and 15, do the following:
Procedure
1. Select the bus. 2. Open the Add Properties dialog from either the Edit > Add Properties menu or by clicking . The Add Properties dialog appears with Type set to Net, Property set to Name, and Bus set to name_of_bus. The Index is indicating . 3. Use the up/down arrows to select the starting bit in the Index entry box, such as 7 in this example. 4. Choose the Delta value for incrementing or decrementing the Index. A + value causes an ascending increment, or a value causes a descending increment. In this example, a Delta of 2 is chosen to preselect ADDRESS(7), ADDRESS(9), ADDRESS(11), ...
114
5. Activate the Net tool by selecting Add > Net or by clicking the
button.
6. Position the cursor over the start position on the bus where you want to rip a net. Note: With the Add Properties dialog open, the cursor indicates the property value that will be placed next as shown below:
7. Click-and-hold the left mouse button while moving the cursor away from the bus to rip a net. 8. Repeat step 7 to rip as many nets as you require. Note: The increment/decrement counter loops back around once it has reached the upper/lower limit.
Related Topics
Ripping Nets from a Bus Aliasing Nets Ripper Symbols Ripping Nets from a Bus Editing Ripped Nets Connecting Components With Buses Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins
115
Ripping Nets Automatically With the Rip Nets Command

Procedure
1. Click on a bus to select it. 2. With the bus selected, right-click on the bus where you want the first net to connect. If you are ripping nets to attach to a symbol, make sure you right-click on the bus across from the first pin on the symbol. 3. Select Rip Nets from the popup menu. The Rip Nets dialog appears with a list of all available nets from the bus. Note: If you want to reverse the order of the displayed list of nets and subsequently the order in which the nets are ripped from the bus, click the arrow shown in the following figure:
4. Select which nets to rip in the Rip Nets dialog box. By default, all nets in the bus are selected. Use the <Shift> key to select contiguous nets. Use the <Ctrl> key to select noncontiguous nets. 5. Click OK. The nets are ripped from the bus, with their unconnected ends attached to the cursor. 6. Move the ripped nets to their connection points and left-click to release them from the cursor. Note To cancel the Rip Nets command, click the <Esc> key.
Related Topics
o o
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order

116
Aliasing Nets Ripper Symbols Editing Ripped Nets

Aliasing Nets
You assign names to nets using the Name property. In DxDesigner, nets with the same name are connected, even if they appear on different sheets.That is, all nets with the same name are actually the same net. However, you might want to connect nets with two different names while preserving the original net names. This is called net aliasing. The following are examples of net aliasing. Note Although you can use net aliasing in all three of the examples below, only the first is recommended. You have migrated a project to DxDesigner from another tool that uses net aliasing. DxDesigner net aliasing allows you to duplicate the behavior of the other tool. Given a bus named A[0:7], you want to rip a net from bit 7 and attach it to a net named C without changing the name of either net. You alias net A7 to net C. You want to connect two power nets while leaving their individual names intact.
Prerequisite
You have already assigned a value to the Name property for each net. For more information, see Adding and Editing Properties.
Procedure
1. Double-click one of the nets you want to alias together. The nets Properties dialog box opens. 2. Change the value of the Name property to include the name of both nets to be aliased, using the following syntax: firstnetname|secondnetname Where the delimiter is the vertical bar or pipe character.
Results
In the navigator, the two nets are replaced by one net named firsthetname,secondnetname. On the schematic, the selected net displays the new name firstnetname|secondnetname, and the unselected net retains its original name.
117
Related Topic
Ripper Symbols
Whenever you rip a net from a bus as shown in Figure 3-9, the appearance of the ripper is dependant on the number of nets being ripped from the bus, and their designation. By default, a ripper designation is the value of the bit being ripped from the bus. Figure 3-9. Ripper Symbols Example
If the ripped nets are connected to a bus with an equivalent number of constituent signals, the ripper appears with a line through it. This is the case if the buses have the same name (A[3:0] connected to A[3:0]) or different names (A[3:0] connected to B[0:3]). If the ripped nets are connected to a bus with a different number of constituent signals, the ripper appears without any line in it. If the ripped nets are connected to a bus that has the same name in which the order of the constituent signals is inverted, the ripper appears with an X in it. For example, A[0:3] connected to A[3:0].
Related Topics
o o
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order
118
Building a Schematic Connecting Components in a Schematic o o o o o
Ripping Nets Automatically With the Rip Nets Command Changing Bit Spacing Using the Mouse Wheel Changing Bit Spacing with the Resize Box Changing Net Orientation on a Vertical Bus Changing Net Orientation on a Horizontal Bus
Editing Ripped Nets

After you rip nets from a bus, you can adjust the appearance of the ripped nets.
Procedures
Changing Bit Spacing Using the Mouse Wheel Changing Bit Spacing with the Resize Box Changing Net Orientation on a Vertical Bus Changing Net Orientation on a Horizontal Bus
Changing Bit Spacing Using the Mouse Wheel

The default spacing for nets you create with the Rip Nets command is two grid points. You can change the spacing dynamically by using the mouse wheel as shown in Figure 3-10 and described in this procedure.
119
Figure 3-10. Using the Mouse Wheel to Change Ripped Net Spacing
Procedure
1. Select all the ripped nets for which you want to change the spacing. They must all be constituents of the same bus. 2. Use Ctrl+Shift+Mouse-Wheel to adjust the space between the nets. Moving the mouse wheel towards you increases the distance between nets; moving it in the other direction decreases it.
Related Topics
o
Ripper Symbols
Editing Ripped Nets Connecting Components With Buses
Changing Bit Spacing with the Resize Box

The default spacing for nets you create with the Rip Nets command is two grid points. You can use the Resize box to change bit spacing as described in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Click on the Select icon in the tool tray at the top of the DxDesigner window.
120
2. Activate the Resize Box tool by selecting Edit > Resize Box. This action adds handles to the box around the selected nets. 3. Click-and-drag on one of the handles to change the spacing. 4. Click elsewhere in the schematic window to deselect the nets. The Resize Box functionality stays active. 5. The next set of nets you select will have resizing handles until you turn Resize Box off. To turn Resize Box off, select Edit > Resize Box again, or press <ESC>, or click the Select icon. Note Resize Box can also be used to adjust the distance between components and other objects in your schematic. It is very useful when adjusting the spacing in an array of components.
Related Topics
o o o o o o o o
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order Ripping Nets Automatically With the Rip Nets Command Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripper Symbols Changing Bit Spacing Using the Mouse Wheel Changing Net Orientation on a Vertical Bus Changing Net Orientation on a Horizontal Bus
Changing Net Orientation on a Vertical Bus

Procedure
1. Click on the Select icon in the tool tray. 2. Click-and-drag a box around the nets and their respective rippers that you want to reorient. 3. Select the Mirror tool by choosing Format > Mirror or clicking the icon.
121
Related Topics
o o o o o o o o
Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripping Nets Manually While Choosing Bits and Specifying Order Ripping Nets Automatically With the Rip Nets Command Ripping Nets from a Bus Manually Ripper Symbols Changing Bit Spacing Using the Mouse Wheel Changing Bit Spacing with the Resize Box Changing Net Orientation on a Horizontal Bus
Changing Net Orientation on a Horizontal Bus

Procedure
1. Click on the Select icon in the tool tray. 2. Click-and-drag a box around the nets and their respective rippers that you want to reorient. 3. Select the Flip tool by choosing Format > Flip or clicking the icon.
Note The Flip and Mirror tools are also useful for changing the orientation of the rippers. The Flip tool changes the orientation of Rippers on a vertical bus. The Mirror tool changes the orientation of the rippers on a horizontal bus.
Related Topics
Connecting Components With Buses Ripping Nets from a Bus Ripper Symbols Editing Ripped Nets
122
Changing/Updating the Net Name Delimiter

You initially set the bus net name delimiter from Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Net Name Delimiter (subcategory). If you change the net name delimiter after you have already ripped them from the bus, you need to update the schematic so the net names show the new setting.
Procedure
Assume the following scenario: Figure 3-11. Example - Changing/Updating Net Name Delimiter
1. Change the Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Net Name Delimiter (subcategory) net name delimiter. In this example the Round Brackets ( ) are changed to the Square Brackets [ ]. Note: After applying the change, it does not yet appear on your schematic. 2. To update your change, select Tools > Update Other Objects. The associated dialog appears. 3. The following figure shows the relationship of the Bus Signals checkbox and the Bus Rippers checkbox from the Update Other Objects dialog. The figure shows how the delimiters are updated once you click OK in the Update Other Objects dialog. For more information about selecting the range of a change, see Update Other Objects Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
123
Figure 3-12. Example - Update Other Objects for Bus Signals/Rippers
Related Topics
Connecting Components with Differential Pairs

Use differential pairs to minimize cross-talk and EMF, and achieve impedance control. You can create differential pairs from either nets or buses. When you create a differential pair, it automatically appears in the Constraint Editor System (CES).
Procedures
Creating Differential Pairs Viewing Differential Pairs in CES
Creating Differential Pairs

You create differential pairs using the Diff Pair property.
Procedure
1. Double-click on a net or bus to view its properties. (See the figure below.) 2. In the cell to the right of the Diff pair property, either use the drop-down list to select the name of the second pair element or enter it manually.
124
Hint: If the names in the drop-down list are too long to read, expand the Value column.
Note The differential pair Property of the other net is updated automatically. You dont have to enter the information twice.
Related Topic
Connecting Components with Nets Viewing Differential Pairs in CES
Viewing Differential Pairs in CES

1. Select Tools > Constraint Editor System to open the Constraint Editor System (CES). 2. In the CES Navigator window, click on the plus (+) sign to expand Constraint Classes, then the plus (+) sign to expand All. (See the figure below.)
125
3. Double-click on Diff pair, and scroll down to view the differential pair you have created. (The list is arranged alphabetically.)
Related Topic
Connecting Components with Nets Creating Differential Pairs
Editing Connectivity
Procedures
Merging Nets Splitting a Net or Bus Creating Intersecting Connections Creating and Editing Unconnected (Dangling) Nets Connecting Unconnected (Dangling) Nets to Components Deleting a Component Without Deleting its Attached Nets Automatically Creating Connection by Net Names Automatically Propagating Net Names to Onsheet/Offsheet Links
Related Topic
126
Merging Nets
You can merge two nets or buses with different names, and select a single name for the merged net.
Procedure
1. Join the two nets together by moving one of the net ends to join with the other. A Net Short dialog box informs you that two nets have been shorted, and gives you the option of which net name to use for the combined net as shown in the following figure: Figure 3-13. Net Short Dialog Example
2. In the Net Short dialog box, select the desired net name. 3. Click OK.
Related Topic
127
Splitting a Net or Bus

To speed up your work, you can place a component on a net or component array onto a bus, This splits the net or bus an creates a serial configuration. You then specify how to name the split net using the Split Net dialog box. This dialog gives you options to either: Keep the existing net name for one side of the split net, and rename the other side Rename both sides of the split net.
Prerequisite
You have assigned a value to the Name property of the net or bus. See Adding a Property. You have opened DxDatabook by selecting Select View > DxDataBook.
Procedure
The following procedure uses the example of splitting a net with an inductor. Figure 3-14. Split Net Dialog Example
128
Selecting the Assign default names to all pieces option discards the existing net name on the selected net segment. You can then use the Properties window to assign net names later.
Related Topic
Types of Net Connections

You can create different types of connections, depending on routing mode, preference, or where you are in the process of creating your design. For example, you might use a dangling connection if you have placed one component, but are waiting for the librarian to finish the symbol for a second component before you place it.
Related Topics
Creating Intersecting Connections
Creating Intersecting Connections

DxDesigner creates intersecting connections automatically, and denotes them with a solder dot. Two nets that cross make a connection only if a round solder dot appears at the crossing. Any incidental crossing of nets or buses from schematic edits does not imply a connection.
Procedure
You configure intersecting connections by setting the following: Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Dot Size (option)
Related Topics
Types of Net Connections Editing Connectivity Bus Dot Width in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Creating and Editing Unconnected (Dangling) Nets

DxDesigner creates dangling nets automatically when you draw a net that does not connect to a pin or another net. DxDesigner denotes dangling connections with a square box at the end of the net.
Procedures
Connecting Unconnected (Dangling) Nets to Components
129
Deleting a Component Without Deleting its Attached Nets Preventing DRC Errors for Unconnected (Dangling) Nets
Connecting Unconnected (Dangling) Nets to Components

Procedure
Click on the dangling net box while the Add Net command is activated. You can then stretch the dangling net by dragging the box until it intersects a component pin
Related Topic
Deleting a Component Without Deleting its Attached Nets

You can delete a component while changing its attached nets to Unconnected (Dangling) Nets.
Procedure
Click and hold the <Ctrl> key when you select Edit > Delete Select Edit > Delete with Cleanup.
Related Topic
Preventing DRC Errors for Unconnected (Dangling) Nets

If you prefer to show spares as nets on a schematic, DxDesigner treats these as Unconnected (Dangling) nets, and Design Rule Checker reports Error108. By using a special net terminator, you can prevent this error, as well as suppressing forward annotation of the unconnected nets. The nets will not appear in CES.
Prerequisites
The Librarian has created a Symbol for you to place at the end of Dangling Nets
o
The symbol has a Term property with an empty value field.
You have specified this symbol in Setup > Settings >Special Components > No Connect Symbols.
Procedure
1. Select the dangling net that you want to terminate.
130
2. Choose Add > Special Components > NC Symbols. 3. Select a symbol from the list that appears. 4. Drag and drop the symbol on to the box at the end of the dangling net. Note: If the box disappears, the symbol has been positioned correctly.
Related Topics
Creating and Editing Unconnected (Dangling) Nets drc-108 description in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Automatically Creating Connection by Net Names

Any two nets on a schematic that have the same name are automatically connected. That is, they are the same net. This is true even if the nets are located on different pages of the schematic. No special off page or on page connector is required to connect nets with the same name on different pages.
Related Topics
o
Automatically Propagating Net Names to Onsheet/Offsheet Links
Automatically Propagating Net Names to Onsheet/Offsheet Links

Procedure
To automatically propagate net names to onsheet and offsheet links, in the DxDesigner window select Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Automatically Propagate net names to on-sheet/off-sheet links. If the option is selected, symbol name changes automatically propagate to the net name. For example, if you set the net name to invisible and the symbol name to visible, and then change the symbol name, the net name is automatically updated and connectivity between the names is maintained. If the option is not selected, changing the symbol name does not change the net name, creating a possible mismatch. This mismatch does not affect connectivity since it is derived from the net name (that is, the net name drives connectivity). Note This option only works for annotate-type onsheet and offsheet links. If the option is not selected (default setting), do not change the link name visibility when naming a net.
131
Building a Schematic Adding Graphics to a Schematic
Related Topics
o
Automatically Creating Connection by Net Names
Adding Graphics to a Schematic

You can add graphical objects to a schematic using the object toolbar buttons or the Add menu commands as described in the following procedures:
Procedures
Adding an Arc Adding a Box Adding a Circle Adding a Line
Related Topic
Working Within the Schematic Editor Adding Text to a Schematic
Adding an Arc
Procedure
1. Select Add > Arc or click on the Object toolbar or type arc on the command line. 2. Click-and-hold the left mouse button down to specify the first endpoint of the arc. 3. Drag the mouse to the location you select as the other endpoint for the arc. 4. Click right mouse button or spacebar to specify the second endpoint. 5. Continue dragging with left mouse button depressed to specify midpoint for arc. 6. Release left mouse button to finish arc. Note To cancel arc placement, press Esc or release left mouse button before specifying the second endpoint for the arc.
132
Related Topic
Adding Text to a Schematic Adding Graphics to a Schematic
o o o
Adding a Box Adding a Circle Adding a Line
Adding a Box
Procedure
1. Select Add > Box or click on the Object toolbar or type box on the command line. 2. Click-and-hold the left mouse button to specify a corner for the box. 3. Drag the mouse to define the box. 4. Once you have the box you want, release the left mouse button.
Related Topic
o o o
Adding an Arc Adding a Circle Adding a Line
Adding a Circle
Procedure
1. Select Add > Circle or click on the Object toolbar or type circle on the command line. 2. Click-and-hold the left mouse button to specify the center of the circle. 3. Drag the mouse to define the circle radius. 4. Once you have the circle you want, release the left mouse button.
133
Tip: All closed drawing objects can be assigned a color, line style, and fill style. Select the object then right-click > Properties to set these values.
Related Topic
o o o
Adding an Arc Adding a Box Adding a Line
Adding a Line
Procedure
1. Select Add > Line or click on the Object toolbar or type line on the command line. 2. Click-and-hold the left mouse button to specify an edge for the line. 3. Drag the mouse to define the line. 4. Click the right mouse button (or press spacebar) to create a polyline. 5. After you have the line you want, release the left mouse button.
Related Topic
o o o
Adding an Arc Adding a Box Adding a Circle
Creating Graphical Arrays

Procedure
1. Select the object or group of objects to include in the array. For more information, see Selecting Objects.
134
2. Choose Add > Array. 3. In the Array Dialog box, specify the type of array you want to create, and then specify the elements of the array, 4. Click OK. The bounding box of the array attaches to the cursor. Move the cursor to produce the shape and object spacing you want, then left-click to complete the array. The examples below show how the resulting arrays would differ for different dialog box choices Example 3-1. Creating an Array In this example, you create a 2 X 4 rectangular array from the single component shown below.
1. Select the component and choose Add > Array 2. In the Array dialog box, leave the Rectangular Array option selected by default.
1. Enter 2 rows and 4 columns. 2. Click OK. Result: The array appears, attached to the cursor.
135
3. Move the cursor until the array is shaped the way you want.
4. Left-click to release the cursor.
Example 3-2. Creating a Diagonal Vector In this example, you create a 1 X 4 diagonal vector from the single component shown below.
136
1. Select the component and choose Add > Array 2. In the Array dialog box, select the Diagonal vector option. 3. Enter 4 for the number of elements.
4. Click OK. Result: The vector, attached to the cursor. 5. Move the cursor down to create a diagonal arrangement of the vector.
137
6. When the diagonal is at the angle you want, left-click to release the cursor. 7.
Related Topics
Adding Graphics to a Schematic Creating Component Arrays
Adding Text to a Schematic

You can add text strings to components or schematics. Text has no association with other graphical objects or with connectivity data.
Procedure
1. Select Add > Text or use the T hotkey or type text on the command line and execute the command. 2. Click-and-hold the left mouse button to create the text locator. 3. Drag the mouse to move the text locator to the desired location. 4. Once you have the text locator where you want, release the left mouse button. 5. Fill in the Text Properties dialog box.
138
Building a Schematic Processing Your Completed Design
To load text from a text file, select the Read from File checkbox and browse to the file you wish to import. The text will be added to your schematic. This is a powerful way to add notes or other text documentation directly to your design.
Processing Your Completed Design

After you complete your design, you can do any of the following: Verify that your design complies with project design rules. See Checking the Design. Prepare a design for forward annotation by assigning reference designators using the Packager. If the design is hierarchical, the packager flattens it. See Packaging A Design on page 289. Create a BOM of the design. See Generating Bills of Materials on page 307. Create a cross-reference of the design. See the Cross-Referencing a Design manual. Archive the design and its libraries. See Archiving Projects on page 291. Print or plot the design. Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF on page 295. Export the design in EDIF format. See EDIF Translation Tools in the DxDesigner Symbol and Schematic Translator User's Guide. Simulate the design. See Help > Documentation in InfoHub > Analysis - Simulation and Signal Integrity. Post-process the design using scripting. See the DxDesigner Automation Reference manual.
139
Building a Schematic Processing Your Completed Design
140
Chapter 4 Working Within the Schematic Editor

Prerequisite
1. Open DxDesigner as described in Starting DxDesigner. 2. Either open an existing project (see Opening a Project), or create a new one (see Creating a Project).
Procedures
Creating a New Schematic Opening an Existing Schematic Copying a Schematic Sheet to Another Project Moving Between Multiple Sheets Linking and Embedding Objects Finding and Replacing Text Viewing Names and Properties as Tooltips Showing Connections to Selected Components Executing Commands Using Strokes Panning and Zooming Within Schematics Selecting Objects Editing Selected Schematic Objects
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
Creating a New Schematic

Procedure
Select the File > New > Schematic pulldown menu item. If the schematic is the first schematic in the project, it appears in the project tree under the Design node as the root block. If it is not the first schematic, it appears under the Blocks node. It contains a sheet named 1 by default. Note Once you have created a schematic, you can open it for editing at any time.
141
Working Within the Schematic Editor Opening an Existing Schematic
Related Topic
Working Within the Schematic Editor
Opening an Existing Schematic

Procedure
1. In the Project Navigator, click the plus sign Designs node. to expand the Project node, and then the
2. From the list of designs under the Designs node, double-click the name of the schematic you want to open. Note: The navigator tree displays the design hierarchy. You can open any schematic in the hierarchy by expanding the nodes and double-clicking the level you want to edit. Note You can also open an existing schematic from the command line: on the command line, enter schematic schematic_name and execute the command. If you execute the command without a schematic name, the Open Schematic dialog box appears. Enter the name in the Schematic field.
Related Topic
Copying a Schematic Sheet to Another Project

Procedure
1. Open the source project. 2. In the Navigator window, select the sheet(s) you want to copy. 3. On the selected sheet(s), right-click > Copy. 4. Open the destination project. (You can skip this step if you are copying and pasting sheets within the same project.)
142
Working Within the Schematic Editor Moving Between Multiple Sheets
5. On the schematic node you want to add the sheet to, right-click > Paste as shown in the following figure:
Results
When nets in the copied sheet already exist in the destination project, the properties of the nets in the copied sheet take precedence over the values of the nets in the destination project. All constraints applicable to objects in the sheet are also copied and take precedence over constraints in the destination project.
Related Topic
Moving Between Multiple Sheets

You can explore multiple sheets of a flat design or the hierarchy of a design as follows:
143
Working Within the Schematic Editor Moving Between Multiple Sheets
Procedures
Figure 4-1. Moving Between Multiple Sheets in a Flat Design
To move to the previous sheet: <Page Up> key (Pop-up) > Previous Sheet (Pop-up) > Goto Sheet On command line, enter psheet or psh
To move to the next sheet: <Page Down> key (Pop-up) > Previous sheet (Pop-up) > Goto Sheet On the command line, enter pop
Figure 4-2. Moving Between Multiple Sheets in a Hierarchical Design
To move down the hierachy: 1. Move the cursor to the desired top-level component. 2. Do one of the following: Right-click > Push Schematic or > Push Language or To move up the hierachy: Either close the lower layer windows or use the Windows menu to select the desired window or On the command line, enter pop.
Left-click (select it) and on the command line, enter psch.
The title bar of the active window indicates the schematic or symbol's name. For additional information on the command line commands shown in the previous figures, see the topic List of Command Line Commands in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
144
Working Within the Schematic Editor Linking and Embedding Objects
Related Topic
Linking and Embedding Objects

You can insert files created in other applications in your DxDesigner schematics. You can either link or embed these files in your schematics. If you embed the file, it becomes part of your DxDesigner project. If you link to the file, the schematic stores only the location of the information, and displays a graphic representation of the information in the schematic. You can also insert objects on border symbols and they appear on the schematic that the border is part of.
Procedures
Creating and Embedding New Objects Embedding an Existing Object Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format Linking Objects
Related Topics
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating and Embedding New Objects Embedding an Existing Object Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format Linking Objects
Creating and Embedding New Objects

Procedure
1. Position the insertion point where you want to embed the object in the document. 2. Click Add> Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears. 3. Click the Create New radio button. 4. Select the type of object you want to create from the Object Type list.
145
The list of object types show the applications installed on your computer. You cannot insert objects created by an application that is not installed. 5. Click OK. The Insert Object dialog box closes and an editable window appears on the schematic. 6. Click anywhere outside the edit window to close the edit window and view the embedded file. 7. Double-click the embedded file to edit it again.
Related Topics
o o o
Embedding an Existing Object Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format Linking Objects
Embedding an Existing Object

Procedure
1. Choose the menu item Add > Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears. 2. Click the Create from File radio button. 3. Enter the path to the file you want to embed. 4. Click OK. The Insert Object dialog box closes and the file appears on the schematic. 5. Double-click the file to edit it. The editing window appears in the DxDesigner schematic. To edit the file in its original application, you need to link the file rather than embed it. See Linking Objects.
Related Topics
o o o
Creating and Embedding New Objects Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format Linking Objects
146
Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format

You can convert the object to a different file format by selecting a different application to be the object's source application.
Procedure
1. Right-click the file you want to convert. 2. Click object_type > Convert. The Convert dialog box appears. 3. Select a new object type from the Object Type list. 4. Click OK. The Convert dialog box closes, and the file is now associated with the new application.
Related Topics
o o o
Creating and Embedding New Objects Embedding an Existing Object Linking Objects
Linking Objects
You can create a link to an object to share the object between two DxDesigner schematics or between a DxDesigner schematic and another application.
Procedure
1. Choose the menu item Add > Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears. 2. Click the Create from File radio button. 3. Enter the path to the file you want to link to. 4. Click the Link check box. 5. If you want the link to appear as an icon, click the Display as Icon check box and select the icon you want to use. If you do not want the link to appear as an icon, it will appear as a representation of the file itself. 6. Click OK. The Insert Object dialog box closes and the link appears on the schematic. 7. Double-click the file to edit it. The file appears in the original application for editing. If you want to edit the file directly in the DxDesigner schematic, you need to embed the file rather than linking to it. See Creating and Embedding New Objects.
147
Working Within the Schematic Editor Finding and Replacing Text
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating and Embedding New Objects Embedding an Existing Object Linking Objects Converting an Embedded Object to a Different File Format
Replacing Selected Symbols/Parts

Procedure
1. Select the symbol you want to replace. 2. Choose the Edit > Replace Symbol menu item or right-click > Replace Symbol. The Replace Symbol/Part dialog box opens. 3. Click Browse. If it is not already visible, CL View tab of the DxDataBook window appears. 4. Select the replacement symbol. It displays in the Replace selected symbol(s)/part(s) with: field. 5. Return to the Replace Symbol/Part dialog box and specify options to control the replacement. 6. Click Replace. Note You can select other symbols and repeat. The Replace Symbol/Port dialog box stays open until you click Close.
Related Topics
Finding and Replacing Text

You can find and replace text on schematic objects, including components, nets, buses, pins, and text.
Procedure
1. Select Edit > Find/Replace. The Find and Replace Text dialog box opens.
148
Working Within the Schematic Editor Viewing Names and Properties as Tooltips
2. In the Find tab, specify what you are searching for and the scope of the search. 3. Click More to specify additional search parameters 4. In the Replace tab, specify the string you want to use to replace the search string. 5. Use the buttons to control how the search and replace are executed.
Related Topics
Working Within the Schematic Editor Find and Replace Text Dialog (DxDesigner Reference Manual)
Viewing Names and Properties as Tooltips

You can configure DxDesigner to display the names and properties of objects as tooltips. You can also select which types of objects to display this information for. The object types you can select are Components, Nets (includes nets and buses), and Pins. Figure 4-3 shows an example of a Component and a Net tooltip. Figure 4-3. Example of Component and Net Tooltip
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Display (category). 2. In the Show tooltips area, select the object types you want to display tooltips for.
Related Topic
Showing Connections to Selected Components

Procedure
1. In a schematic, select the component(s) of interest. 2. Right-click > List Connected Nets.
149
Working Within the Schematic Editor Executing Commands Using Strokes
Results
The results appear in the Output window as shown in Figure 4-4: Figure 4-4. Example - Listing Connected Nets of Selected Component
Related Topic
Executing Commands Using Strokes

In addition to using menus and toolbars, you can execute commands using strokes. Strokes are predefined patterns of mouse movements that you use to execute commands or functions. You draw the pattern on an imaginary grid on the schematic. The grid translates the pattern into a numerical sequence and executes the command. You must enable the strokes to turn on the grid recognition. The following table shows the numerical sequences that the strokes recognize and translate into commands. Table 4-1. Numerical Sequences Defining Strokes Stroke grid 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9
The following files define the strokes and shortcut keys. Depending on your platform, and depending on whether you turn on Expedition Style Keybindings in Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) will determine which set of bindings is in effect for your session.
150
vdbindings.vbs - Contains default DxDesigner stroke definitions (See List of DxDesigner vdbindings.vbs Stroke Definitions) exped_wvo.vbs - Contains Expedition style stroke definitions for PC (See List of DxDesigner exped_wvo.vbs Stroke Definitions)
Prerequisite
Strokes must be enabled before they are available. See Enabling Strokes.
Procedure
1. Press the stroke mouse button (either middle or right) that you selected in the Settings dialog box. 2. Move the mouse in the predefined stroke pattern for the function, and release the mouse button. As you move the mouse to draw the pattern, a red line follows the mouse movement in the window to show you the pattern you are creating.
Related Topics
o o o o
Enabling Strokes Disabling Strokes Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File
DxDesigner Key Bindings and Strokes in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Enabling Strokes
Procedure
From the Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subcategory), click the Right Button or Middle Button option to set the strokes.
Related Topics
o o o
Disabling Strokes Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File
151
Disabling Strokes
Procedure
Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subcategory), click the Strokes off option.
Related Topics
o o o
Enabling Strokes Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File
Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File

You bind strokes to mouse movements in the same manner as you bind shortcuts to keys. You use the bindings to execute commands or functions that you use often. You can customize the strokes by adding or deleting strokes, or changing the numerical sequence associated with an existing stroke. You customize strokes by editing one or more of the following files: vdbindings.vbs - Contains default DxDesigner stroke definitions (See List of DxDesigner vdbindings.vbs Stroke Definitions) exped_wvo.vbs - Contains Expedition style stroke definitions for PC (See List of DxDesigner exped_wvo.vbs Stroke Definitions)
These files are in the $SDD_HOME/standard directory of your installation. Note You can also place copies of these files elsewhere in the WDIR search path to enable you to customize your personal settings, without affecting other users. For more information, see WDIR Environment Variable in the DxDesigner Administrators Guide.
Restriction
You can only add strokes for commands that are already in the .vbs file and are bound to a key.
Procedure
As an example, to add a stroke for the numerical sequence 1478963, which the system recognizes as AddArc, enter the following:
Bindings ("Stroke").AddStroke "1478963", "AddArc"
152
Working Within the Schematic Editor Panning and Zooming Within Schematics
Related Topics
o o o
Enabling Strokes Disabling Strokes Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File
Viewing Strokes Defined in the .vbs File

Procedure
You can view the strokes defined in the active .vbs, as well as the commands they execute by clicking the Help > Show Bindings menu. For a listing of bindings organized by logical function actions, see one of the following: DxDesigner Key Bindings - Default (DxDesigner Reference Manual) DxDesigner Key Bindings - Expedition Style (DxDesigner Reference Manual
Related Topics
o o o
Enabling Strokes Disabling Strokes Customizing Strokes Using Bindings Definitions File
Panning and Zooming Within Schematics

You pan and zoom to change your view of the schematic. The following list shows the three styles of pan and zoom. Select your style according to your personal preferences and/or the flow you are working in.
Procedures
Panning and Zooming Expedition-Style Panning and Zooming DxDesigner-Style Panning and Zooming PADS-Style
153
These styles define the mouse actions. The following menu choices, and associated toolbar buttons and shortcut keys work the same for all three styles:
Panning and Zooming Expedition-Style

Although you can use any pan and zoom styles, Expedition-style is particularly useful when working in an Integrated Expedition workflow. These are described in the following procedures.
Prerequisite
Enable Expedition-style Pan and Zoom by selecting Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subcategory) > Expedition Pan and Zoom (button). Click OK.
Procedures
Panning Expedition-Style Zooming In Expedition-Style Zooming Out Expedition-Style
Related Topics
o o
Panning and Zooming DxDesigner-Style Panning and Zooming PADS-Style
Panning Expedition-Style
Procedure
1. Click in the schematic window near the edge towards which you want to pan. 2. Click-and-hold the scroll wheel (Windows only) or middle mouse button.
154
3. Slowly move the cursor in the direction towards which you want to pan. An arrow appears showing the direction of the pan.
Related Topics
o o
Zooming In Expedition-Style Zooming Out Expedition-Style
Zooming In Expedition-Style
Choose one of the following methods to zoom in Expedition-style:
Procedure
(Windows only) Scroll wheel up Click middle mouse button
Related Topics
o o
Panning Expedition-Style Zooming Out Expedition-Style
Zooming Out Expedition-Style

Choose one of the following methods to zoom out Expedition-style:
Procedure
(Windows only) Scroll wheel down Click Shift + middle mouse button
Related Topics
o o
Panning Expedition-Style Zooming In Expedition-Style
155
Panning and Zooming DxDesigner-Style

Although you can use any pan and zoom styles, DxDesigner-style is particularly useful when working in a Netlist workflow.
Prerequisite
Enable DxDesigner-style Pan and Zoom by selecting Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (category) > Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subcategory) > Default Pan and Zoom (button). Click OK.
Procedures
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window Zooming In on a Selected Object
Related Topics
o o
Panning and Zooming Expedition-Style Panning and Zooming PADS-Style
Panning DxDesigner-Style
Procedure
1. Click in the schematic window near the edge towards which you want to pan. 2. Click and hold the scroll wheel (Windows only) or middle mouse button. 3. Slowly move the cursor in the direction towards which you want to pan. An arrow appears showing the direction of the pan.
Related Topics
o o
Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet
156
Working Within the Schematic Editor Panning and Zooming Within Schematics o o o
Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window Zooming In on a Selected Object
Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area

Procedure
1. Select View > Zoom Area or click F9. 2. Drag the cursor to form a box around the area you want to zoom in on. 3. Release the cursor. The view zooms in. 4. Repeat until you have zoomed in sufficiently.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window Zooming In on a Selected Object
Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet

Procedure
Click the Zoom In button.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window Zooming In on a Selected Object
157
Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet

Procedure
Click the Zoom Out button.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window Zooming In on a Selected Object
Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window

Procedure
Click the Fit All button.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming In on a Selected Object
Zooming In on a Selected Object

Procedure
1. Select the object or group of objects you want to zoom in on. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. Choose View > Fit Selected or click the button or enter zselect on the command line.
158
Tip: If you want to zoom in more tightly than the default, you set the VL_FULL_ZOOM environment variable, using the syntax VL_FuLL_ZOOM=1. If you do not set this environment variable, you will zoom in at a medium distance from the selected object. 3. Pressing Esc cancels the redisplay.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning DxDesigner-Style Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Selected Area Zooming In DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming Out DxDesigner-Style On Entire Sheet Zooming to Fit the Schematic to the Window
Panning and Zooming PADS-Style

Although you can use any pan and zoom styles, PADS style is particularly useful when your layout tool is PADS Layout.
Prerequisite
Enable PADS-style Pan and Zoom by selecting Setup > Settings > Schematic Editor (section) > Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subsection) > PADS Pan and Zoom (button). Click OK.
Procedures
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
Related Topics
o
159
Working Within the Schematic Editor Panning and Zooming Within Schematics o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button

Procedure
Click the middle mouse button where you want to center the work area. The screen repaints, placing the point you chose at the center.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel

Procedure
To scroll up, rotate the wheel away from you. To scroll down, rotate the wheel towards you.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel

Procedure
To scroll left, press the Shift key while rotating the wheel away from you. To scroll right, press the Shift key while rotating the wheel towards you.
160
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area

Procedure
1. Move the cursor to the center of the area you want to zoom in on. 2. Hold the middle mouse button down and move the mouse up across the area you want to zoom in. A dynamic bounding box expands with the cursor movement as shown in the Figure 4-5 example. 3. Release the middle mouse button to zoom in to area defined by the bounding box. Figure 4-5. Example of PADS-Style Zoom-In Bounding Box
161
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box

Procedure
1. Position the cursor anywhere within the schematic window. 2. Hold down the middle mouse button and drag the cursor down. As shown in Figure 4-6, the larger the box, the greater the zoom-out factor. In the figure, the box named 1 zooms out a little, whereas the box named 2 zooms out much more. Figure 4-6. Example of PADS-Style Zoom-Out Box
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel
162
Working Within the Schematic Editor Selecting Objects
Zooming In or Out From Schematic Center Using Mouse Wheel

Procedure
To zoom in, hold the Ctrl key while moving the mouse wheel away from you. To zoom out, hold the Ctrl key while moving the mouse wheel towards you.
Related Topics
o o o o o
Panning PADS-Style Using the Middle Mouse Button Panning PADS-Style Vertically Using the Mouse Wheel Panning PADS-Style Horizontally Using the Mouse Wheel Zooming In PADS-Style on a Selected Area Zooming Out PADS-Style Using the Dynamic Bounding Box
Selecting Objects
You select an object when you want to edit its properties, move it, or zoom in on it. Deselect an object when you want to exclude it from an operation.
Prerequisite
Before you can select an object, you must be in Select mode. To enter Select mode, click the button. The Select button is depressed when you are in select mode. To select an object of a particular type, the selection filter must include the desired type. See Filtering Which Objects to Select.
Procedures
Selecting Components Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select
For procedures on deselecting objects, see Deselecting Objects.
Related Topics
Editing Selected Schematic Objects
163
Selection Rules
Selection Rules
When you select an object, the object outline is highlighted. When you select a net, bus, pin, or component, all associated names and properties are also selected. You can configure DxDesigner to select object that are partially in a selection area. If you enable this functionality and you drag-select, all objects touched by the outline will be selected, even if they are not completely enclosed. If the selected object contains associated names and properties that are visible on the schematic, a text-owner indicator line visually connects the text to the center of the object that owns it as shown in the following figure:
Selecting a Net or Bus

Procedure
1. Place the cursor on a segment of the net or bus and click the left mouse button.
164
2. With the cursor still on the same selected segment, press <Ctrl> and click the left mouse button again. The DxDesigner schematic editor selects the entire net or bus up to the solder joint.
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting Components Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select Deselecting Objects
Selecting Components
There is more than one method to select components. Do one of the following:
Procedure
Click an individual component to select it. Select from the Command line: Type scomp component_name in the command line field and execute the command. If you do not enter the component_name on the command line, the Select Component dialog box appears so you can enter the component name. Enter the component name in the component name field.
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select Deselecting Objects
165
Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name

Procedure
1. Select Edit > Find/Replace. 2. In the Find and Replace Text dialog box, in the Find what field, enter the name of the component you are looking for, such as capacitor. 3. Choose the scope of your search in the Within field. 4. Click the Find All button. All components that are found are selected.
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Components Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select Deselecting Objects
Selecting Nets and Net Segments

There is more than one method to nets and net segments. Do one of the following:
Procedure
To select a net or a net segment, do one of the following:
o
In the Schematic Editor, click a net segment to select it. To select another net segment, <Ctrl>-click the next net segment. Draw a selection box around the desired nets or net segments. In the Project Navigator Contents Window, select the line or lines that show the net you want to select. It is also selected on the schematic.
o o
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Components

166
Working Within the Schematic Editor Selecting Objects o o o o
Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select Deselecting Objects
Select Objects Using the Command Line

Procedures
Selecting Names Selecting Labels and Associated Objects Selecting Objects Associated with Specified Property Value(s) Selecting a Text String
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Components Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Filtering Which Objects to Select Deselecting Objects
Selecting Names
Procedure
1. Type slabel label_name in the command line field and execute the command. 2. If you do not specify label_name, the Select Label dialog box appears. In the Select Label dialog box, enter the name of the label you want to select and the specify if you want the select to apply to all labels, then click OK.
Related Topics
o
Selecting Labels and Associated Objects
167
Working Within the Schematic Editor Selecting Objects o o
Selecting Objects Associated with Specified Property Value(s) Selecting a Text String
Selecting Labels and Associated Objects

Procedure
1. Type sname selected_name in the command line field and execute the command. 2. If you do not specify selected_name, the Select Name dialog box appears. In the Select Name dialog box, enter the Internal name or label of the desired objects, then click OK.
Related Topics
o o o
Selecting Names Selecting Objects Associated with Specified Property Value(s) Selecting a Text String
Selecting Objects Associated with Specified Property Value(s)

Procedure
Type svalue property_value on the command line and execute the command. If you do not specify property_value, the Select Value dialog box appears. Enter the property_value, specify if you want the select to apply to all properties matching the select criteria, then click OK.
Related Topics
o o o
Selecting Names Selecting Labels and Associated Objects Selecting a Text String
Selecting a Text String

Procedure
1. Type stext on the command line and execute the command. You can use wildcard characters when specifying the text string.
168
Working Within the Schematic Editor Deselecting Objects
2. In the Select Text dialog box, enter the text to select and specify if you want the select to apply to all text strings matching the select criteria, then click OK.
Related Topics
o o o
Selecting Names Selecting Labels and Associated Objects Selecting Objects Associated with Specified Property Value(s)
Deselecting Objects
A selected object remains selected until you deselect it, delete it, or select something else.
Procedures
Deselecting all Selected Objects Deselecting a Single Object Deselecting a Group of Objects
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Components Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Filtering Which Objects to Select
Deselecting all Selected Objects

Procedure
Place the cursor in an empty area of the schematic, then left-click.
Related Topics
Deselecting Objects
169
Working Within the Schematic Editor Deselecting Objects o o
Deselecting a Single Object Deselecting a Group of Objects
Deselecting a Single Object

Procedure
<Shift> + left-click the object you want to deselect. Note: On a net where only some segments are selected, the following rules apply: If you <Shift> +left-click a selected segment, only that segment is deselected. If you <Shift> +left-click a deselected segment, the entire net or bus is deselected.
Related Topics
Deselecting Objects
o o
Deselecting all Selected Objects Deselecting a Group of Objects
Deselecting a Group of Objects

Procedure
1. Depress the <Shift> key. 2. Click-and-drag the left mouse button to form a box over the group or area that you want to deselect. 3. Release the left mouse button. DxDesigner deselects all selected objects located completely within the box. If any part of an object appears outside of the box, DxDesigner does not deselect the object.
Related Topics
Deselecting Objects
o o
Deselecting all Selected Objects Deselecting a Single Object
170
Working Within the Schematic Editor Deselecting Objects
Filtering Which Objects to Select

At times, you may want to select some objects but not others. For example, you might want to select a net, but not the net name. This is particularly difficult on dense designs. To filter which objects you select, use the Selection Filter as described in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Select View > Other Windows > Selection Filter or click the You will be presented with the following choices: All Arc Border Box Circle Line Name Net and Bus Pin Property Ripper Symbol Text 2. Select All, or deselect All and select any combination of the objects in the upper section of the list. Caution Be sure to reset the selection filter to All before closing the schematic. If you do not, you may see an unexplained inability to select certain objects the next time you work on the schematic. button.
Related Topics
Selecting Objects
o o o o o o
Selecting a Net or Bus Selecting Components Selecting Multiple Components With the Same Name Selecting Nets and Net Segments Select Objects Using the Command Line Deselecting Objects
171
Working Within the Schematic Editor Editing Selected Schematic Objects

The following topics outline the procedures of some of the schematic editing tasks that can be accessed from the menus or their equivalent command line commands on selected schematic objects:
Procedures
Aligning Selected Objects Reflecting (Flip-Mirror) a Selected Object Rotating a Selected Object Scaling a Selected Object Changing Size of Selected Text, Properties, or Names Stretching a Selected Object Copying - Cutting - Moving - Selected Objects Creating Component Arrays Finding and Changing the Name of a Selected Text String Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins
Prerequisite
Select the object(s) as described in Selecting Objects prior to performing the operations described in the procedures above.
Related Topic
Aligning Selected Objects

After placing objects you may want to clean up the schematic by lining up groups of objects. You can choose to align multiple-selected objects either on a horizontal axis (align top sides or align bottom sides), or on a vertical axis (align left sides or align right sides).
Procedures
Aligning Components Aligning Net Segments on a Horizontal Axis Aligning Net Segments on a Vertical Axis
Related Topic
172
Aligning Components
Procedure
1. Select the components that you want to align. For more information on selecting objects, see Selecting Objects. 2. Choose either a horizontal or vertical orientation for the alignment as follows: For a horizontal alignment, choose either Format > Align Top (or click Format > Align Bottom (or click ). See Figure 4-7. For a vertical alignment, choose either Format > Align Right (or click Format > Align Left (or click ). See Figure 4-8. Figure 4-7. Aligning Selected Components on a Horizontal Axis ) or ) or
173
Figure 4-8. Aligning Selected Components on a Vertical Axis
Related Topic
Aligning Net Segments on a Horizontal Axis

Note The orientation of the selected nets determine which alignment features are available. Horizontally-oriented net segments cannot be aligned either left or right, so those selections are not available.
Procedure
1. Select the net segments that you want to align. For more information on selecting objects, see Selecting Objects.
174
2. Choose either Format > Align Top (or click ). See Figure 4-9.
) or Format > Align Bottom (or click
Figure 4-9. Aligning Net Segments on a Horizontal Axis
Related Topic
Aligning Net Segments on a Vertical Axis

Note The orientation of the selected nets determine which alignment features are available. Vertically-oriented net segments cannot be aligned either top or bottom, so those selections are not available.
Procedure
1. Select the net segments that you want to align. For more information on selecting objects, see Selecting Objects. 2. Choose either Format > Align Right (or click ). See Figure 4-10. ) or Format > Align Left (or click
175
Figure 4-10. Aligning Net Segments on a Vertical Axis
Related Topic
Reflecting (Flip-Mirror) a Selected Object

You can reflect the selected object(s) as a mirror image across a horizontal or vertical line as shown in the following procedures:
Procedures
Flipping an Object or Group of Objects Flipping the Selected Object(s) Around a Defined Axis Note You cannot flip/mirror (transform) nets. If you want to select multiple objects to flip/mirror, you must exclude nets from the group (use the Select filter ).
Prerequisite
If you are flipping or mirroring more than one object, you set the mode of the Flip or Mirror functions with Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Flip/Mirror objects separately. If you are operating on only one object at a time, this setting does not have a noticeable effect.
176
For more information, see the following topics: Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against Each Objects Symmetry Axis Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against the Symmetry Axis of the Entire Selected Group
Related Topic
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against Each Objects Symmetry Axis

Procedure
Check the box in Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Flip/Mirror objects separately . (Click OK.) See Figure 4-11 for an example with this feature set.
Figure 4-11. Flip/Mirror Objects Separately (ON) - Before/After Mirroring
Related Topics
o
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against the Symmetry Axis of the Entire Selected Group Flipping an Object or Group of Objects
177
Working Within the Schematic Editor Editing Selected Schematic Objects o
Flipping the Selected Object(s) Around a Defined Axis
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against the Symmetry Axis of the Entire Selected Group
Procedure
Uncheck the box in Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Flip/Mirror objects separately . (Click OK.) See Figure 4-12 for an example with this feature turned off.
Figure 4-12. Flip/Mirror Objects Separately (OFF) - Before/After Mirroring
Related Topics
o
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against Each Objects Symmetry Axis Flipping an Object or Group of Objects Flipping the Selected Object(s) Around a Defined Axis
o o
178
Flipping an Object or Group of Objects

Procedure
1. Select the object or objects you want to reflect. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. To flip: a. Horizontally, select Format > Mirror, or click .
Result: Objects are reflected 180 degrees about their horizontal axis. b. Vertically, select Format > Flip, or click .
Result: Objects are reflected 180 degrees about their vertical axis.
Related Topics
o
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against Each Objects Symmetry Axis Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against the Symmetry Axis of the Entire Selected Group Flipping the Selected Object(s) Around a Defined Axis
Flipping the Selected Object(s) Around a Defined Axis

Procedure
1. Choose the desired Flip/Mirror mode in Setup > Settings > Advanced (category) > Flip/Mirror objects separately. 2. Select the desired object(s). 3. Type reflect in the command line. 4. On the schematic, use the mouse to draw either a horizontal or vertical line through the selected object(s) to define the axis of rotation. Result: Objects are reflected 180 degrees about the axis that you defined.
Related Topics
o
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against Each Objects Symmetry Axis
179
Working Within the Schematic Editor Editing Selected Schematic Objects o
Setting - Group of Objects is Flipped/Mirrored Against the Symmetry Axis of the Entire Selected Group Flipping an Object or Group of Objects
Rotating a Selected Object

You can rotate the selected object(s) to the left in 90-degree increments as shown in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Select the object or group of objects. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. Select Format > Rotate. 3. For additional rotations, repeat these steps.
Related Topic
Scaling a Selected Object

You can scale the size of the selected object or group of objects by the scale factor you specify as described in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Select the object or group of objects you want to scale. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. Choose Format > Scale or click or type scale on the command line and execute the command. 3. Fill in the Scale factor field of the Scale dialog box. 4. Click OK.
Related Topic
180
Changing Size of Selected Text, Properties, or Names

You can change text, properties, or names to a specified size in the schematic or symbol window from the command line as described in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Select the text, property, or name. 2. Type size new_value in the command line field and execute the command. If you do not specify new_value, a Text Size dialog box appears. 3. In the Text Size dialog box, enter the size you want to change the text to. 4. Click OK.
Related Topic
Stretching a Selected Object

You can stretch the selected object in any direction as described in this procedure. Stretchable objects are: Lines, Boxes, Circles, Arcs, and Pins.
Procedure
1. Select the object or group of objects you want to stretch. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. Choose Format > Stretch or click or type stretch on the command line and execute the command. 3. With the left mouse button, use the cursor to grab the object and drag it to the shape and size you want. 4. Release the mouse button.
Related Topic
Copying - Cutting - Moving - Selected Objects

You can duplicate (copy), cut (copy and remove), or move objects from one DxDesigner window to another DxDesigner window, or to another application as described in the following procedures:
181
Procedures
Moving Objects to a Different Location in the Same Window Copying Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Cutting Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Copying/Pasting a Block to Another Project
Also see Pasting Objects From the Clipboard.
Related Topic
Moving Objects to a Different Location in the Same Window

Procedure
1. Select the object(s). 2. Drag and drop it to the new location in the window. Note: If you are moving a selected component, you may want to disconnect it first to preserve the attached nets and buses by selecting Edit > Disconnect.
Related Topics
o o o o
Copying Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Cutting Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Copying/Pasting a Block to Another Project Pasting Objects From the Clipboard
Copying/Pasting a Block to Another Project

Procedure
1. In the Project Navigator Tree of the source project, select the block you want to copy. 2. Right-click > Copy. 3. Select File > Open > Project 4. DxDesigner warns you that it is closing the source project. Click OK. The destination project opens.
182
5. In the Project Navigator Tree of the destination project, select the Block node. 6. Right-click > Paste.
Related Topics
o o o o
Moving Objects to a Different Location in the Same Window Copying Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Cutting Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Pasting Objects From the Clipboard
Pasting Objects From the Clipboard

You can paste the contents of the clipboard into the drawing at the location you specify as shown in this procedure.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Paste or click . 2. When performing a paste, start with the cursor in the approximate location you want the lower left corner of the pasted object to land. 3. Press-and-hold the left mouse button as you move the mouse slightly. This causes the object to appear on the cursor and you can then place it as necessary. You can use the function keys while dragging the pasted objects to move around the schematic. 4. Once you have the object in place, release the mouse button. Note To paste information in a specified format, or create a link to information that can be updated in another application, use the Edit > Paste Special ... menu item to bring up the Paste Special dialog box. For a list of options available, see Paste Special Dialog Box in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Related Topics
o o o o
Moving Objects to a Different Location in the Same Window Copying Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Cutting Objects or a Schematic Section to a Clipboard Copying/Pasting a Block to Another Project
183
Finding and Changing the Name of a Selected Text String

In addition to changing the name of any property in the Properties window for the selected object, you can find and change the name of any selected name, property, or text string as described in the following procedures:
Procedures
Finding a String from the Find/Replace Dialog Replacing a String from the Find/Replace Dialog Changing a String Using the Command Line
Also see Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins.
Related Topics
Finding a String from the Find/Replace Dialog

Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Find/Replace. 2. In the Find and Replace Text dialog box, the Find tab, enter the string you want to find, and set the scope of the search. 3. Optionally, click More. 4. Specify additional search parameters. 5. Click Find Next or Find All.
Related Topics
o o
Replacing a String from the Find/Replace Dialog Changing a String Using the Command Line
Replacing a String from the Find/Replace Dialog

Procedure
1. After you have filled in the Find tab, click the Replace tab. 2. Enter the replacement string.
184
3. Click Find Next. 4. Once the string is found, click Replace or Replace All.
Related Topics
o o
Finding a String from the Find/Replace Dialog Changing a String Using the Command Line
Changing a String Using the Command Line

Procedure
1. On the schematic, select the string that you want to change. For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163. 2. Type string on the command line and execute the command. 3. Enter the new string name in the Edit String dialog box. 4. Click OK.
Related Topics
o o
Finding a String from the Find/Replace Dialog Replacing a String from the Find/Replace Dialog
Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins

DxDesigner allows you to place multiple nets, components, or pins and then quickly add or change predefined properties for groups of related object types. The methods shown in this section use the Add Properties dialog, which is accessible from either the Edit > Add Properties menu, or by clicking the button. This dialog provides two modes of use as follows: Consecutive ordering - The selected objects change property values in consecutive order (either top-to-bottom or left-to-right) as specified in the Add Properties dialog after you click the Apply button. Non-consecutive ordering - This method allows you to apply the new property values by click-selecting objects in any order you choose.
185
See the following procedures for more information:
Procedures
Changing Multiple Pin Property Values in Consecutive Order Changing Multiple Component Property Values in Consecutive Order Changing Multiple Net Properties in Non-Consecutive Order
Related Topics
Editing Selected Schematic Objects Specifying the Characteristics of Components
Changing Multiple Pin Property Values in Consecutive Order

This procedure shows an example (see Example 4-1) of changing multiple pin property values using the consecutive ordering method. Example 4-1. Changing Multiple Pin Property Values - Consecutive Ordering
Procedure
1. Open the Add Properties dialog either from the Edit > Add Properties menu, or by clicking the button. 2. Under Object Type, use the pulldown list to select the Pin object type. 3. Under Property, use the pulldown list to select the desired property. In this example we used Pin Number and Instance values (in the second pulldown list). 4. In the Prefix field, enter the common prefix for all the Pin Number property values. In this example, enter IN. 5. In the Value field, enter the starting value. In this example a decimal 0 is entered.
186
6. Choose a Delta value with which to increment (a positive number) or decrement (a negative number if decimal) the value. 7. If the property value contains a suffix, enter it in the Suffix field. Note: The Hint field shows how the value will appear. 8. On the schematic, group-select all the desired pins. (For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163.) 9. In the Add Properties dialog, click Apply to propagate the properties to the selected pins. The properties are incremented top-to-bottom, or left-to-right. 10. Close the Add Properties dialog.
Related Topics
o o
Changing Multiple Component Property Values in Consecutive Order Changing Multiple Net Properties in Non-Consecutive Order
Add Properties Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Changing Multiple Component Property Values in Consecutive Order

This procedure shows an example (see Example 4-2) of changing multiple component property values using the consecutive ordering method. It also uses a Lexical (alphanumeric) value rather than a Decimal value.
187
Example 4-2. Changing Multiple Component Property Values - Consecutive Ordering
1. Open the Add Properties dialog either from the Edit > Add Properties menu, or by clicking the button. 2. Under Object Type, use the pulldown list to select the Component object type. 3. Under Property, use the pulldown list to select the desired property. In this example we used Name. With Name selected, Instance values is the default in the second pulldown list. 4. In the Prefix field, enter the desired prefix. In this example, Memory_ is used. 5. In the Value field, enter either a lexical or decimal value. In this example, A0 is used, which sets the field to Lexical. The Value field indicates the lexical value with the icon. 6. Choose a Delta value with which to increment (a positive number) or decrement (a negative number if decimal) the value. 7. If the property value contains a suffix, enter it in the Suffix field. Note: The Hint field shows how the value will appear.
188
8. On the schematic, group-select all the desired components. (For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163.) 9. In the Add Properties dialog, click Apply to propagate the properties to the selected pins. The properties are incremented top-to-bottom, or left-to-right. 10. Close the Add Properties dialog.
Related Topics
o o
Changing Multiple Pin Property Values in Consecutive Order Changing Multiple Net Properties in Non-Consecutive Order
Changing Multiple Net Properties in Non-Consecutive Order

This procedure shows an example (see Example 4-3) of changing multiple net property values using the non-consecutive ordering method. Example 4-3. Changing Multiple Net Properties - Non-Consecutive Ordering
1. On the schematic, group-select all the desired nets. (For more information, see Selecting Objects on page 163.) 2. Open the Add Properties dialog either from the Edit > Add Properties menu, or by clicking the button. Note that the Apply button is not active. 3. Note that under Object Type, Net is preselected because of your previous selections. 4. Under Property, use the pulldown list to select the desired property. In this example we used Name.
189
5. In the Prefix field, enter the desired prefix. In this example, SELECT_ is used. 6. In the Value field, enter either a lexical or decimal value. In this example, 5 is used, which sets the field to Decimal . 7. Choose a Delta value with which to increment (a positive number) or decrement (a negative number if decimal) the value. In this example we used a -1. 8. If the property value contains a suffix, enter it in the Suffix field. Note: The Hint field shows how the value will appear. Also note that the schematic cursor now indicates the next property value to be placed. With our example settings, the first value to be placed is SELECT_5. 9. Click-select the desired net. Continue click-selecting the remaining nets until all property values have been changed. 10. Close the Add Properties dialog.
Related Topics
o o
Changing Multiple Pin Property Values in Consecutive Order Changing Multiple Component Property Values in Consecutive Order
190
Chapter 5 Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet

You can create and edit designs in a spreadsheet called an Interconnectivity Table (ICT). ICTs are one of two types of blocks you can create in DxDesigner. They appear in the Project Navigator window with the following icon . In an ICT, symbols populate the columns and nets populate the rows. You define connectivity where the symbol pins column and the nets row intersect as shown in Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1. Interconnectivity Table Layout
Procedures
Creating an ICT Design Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet Specifying the Characteristics of Components Printing an ICT Block
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner DxDesigner Project Navigator Design Objects
Creating an ICT Design

The basic process of creating an ICT design is to create the block, add components, connect the components, and add hierarchy if needed.
191
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Creating an ICT Design
Procedures
1. Creating an ICT Block 2. Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block 3. Adding Components to an ICT Block 4. Adding Connectivity to Components in an ICT Block 5. Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block
Related Topics
o o
Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet Printing an ICT Block
Creating an ICT Block

You can change any schematic block to an ICT block with RMB: Change to ICT on a schematic block in the navigator window. You can also create an ICT Block from scratch as follows.
Prerequisite
A project must be open in DxDesigner. See Opening a Project or Creating a Project.
Procedure
1. Select File > New > Interconnectivity Table. The new ICT appears in the viewing window and its name appears in the Navigator window as Blockn, where n increments with each new ICT.
192
Figure 5-2. New Block in Interconnectivity Table (ICT)
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating an ICT Block Adding Components to an ICT Block Adding Connectivity to Components in an ICT Block Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block
Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block

You can convert a schematic block to an ICT block, but you cannot convert an ICT block to a schematic block. The process is irreversible. If you want to preserve the original schematic, make a copy of it then convert the copy to an ICT. You can view a schematic in spreadsheet form with the ICT viewer. This does not convert the schematic block to an ICT block, it only provides a temporary view. See Interconnectivity Table Viewer for more information.
Procedure
1. In the Navigator pane, right-click the schematic block you want to convert to an ICT. 2. Click Change to ICT. A popup window warns that all graphical information will be lost if you proceed. 3. Click Yes in the popup window.
193
The schematic changes to an ICT spreadsheet.
Related Topics
o
Creating an ICT Block
Adding Components to an ICT Block

Add components to the heads of the columns. Any component pins are collapsed from view.
Prerequisites
An ICT block must exist. See Creating an ICT Block.
Procedure
1. Open the DxDataBook window with View > DxDataBook. 2. Click the CL View tab at the bottom of the DxDatabook window to view the Symbol window. 3. Click the Symbol View tab. 4. Select a symbol from the list. A graphical representation of the symbol appears in the symbol view pane. 5. If you want to automatically add nets and net names while placing the symbol in the design, click the Add Nets and Add Net Names check boxes in the Symbol View pane. You cannot select Add Net Names unless you have first selected Add Nets. 6. Click the Place Symbol button above the Symbol View pane. 7. Click the main cell in the ICT block header to place the symbol. Click multiple times to place multiple instances of the symbol. If a symbol has any pins without net connections, a red circle with a yellow x appears on the ICT icon for the symbol. After you connect all pins to nets, the red circle/yellow x overlay disappears. 8. Right-click to quit the Place Symbol function. Note You can also drag and drop from the Preview symbol window to place a single instance of the symbol into the table. drop the symbol on any icon in the component row at the header of the ICT. The new symbol instance appears to the right of the component on which you dropped the symbol.
194
Results
You can now add connectivity to the components in your ICT block.
Related Topics
o o o o
Adding Connectivity to Components in an ICT Block

You add connectivity to your ICT blocks with spreadsheet controls on the cells where the net row and block column intersect.
Prerequisites
Components must exist in the ICT Block. See Adding Components to an ICT Block.
Procedure
Importing and Exporting Connectivity to an ICT Block Adding Nets to ICT Components Adding Nets to an ICT Block with Advanced Connect Creating and Removing a Differential Pair Adding a Bus in an ICT Block Ripping a Bus or Subset of Nets from ICT Bus
Related Topics
o o o o
Creating an ICT Block Adding Components to an ICT Block Adding Connectivity to an ICT Block Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block
195
Importing and Exporting Connectivity to an ICT Block

You can import from and export to a CSV file or a CSV selection in the clipboard. You can set up the connectivity in a two-column text file separated by tabs. The file type is .nfs (nets for symbols).
Procedures
Importing Connectivity from an nfs File Exporting Connectivity to an nfs File
Related Topics
Importing Connectivity from an nfs File

Import to read the connectivity information from a .nfs file created in an ASCII editor or saved from Excel as a CSV file.
Procedure
1. Right-click the block or symbol whose connectivity information you want to import. 2. Click Import connectivity > From file to import from a .nfs file. 3. Click Import connectivity > From clipboard to import from a selection on the clipboard.
Related Topics
o
Exporting Connectivity to an nfs File
Exporting Connectivity to an nfs File

Export to a .nfs file to verify connectivity in the ICT with an external source.
Procedure
1. Right-click the block or symbol whose connectivity information you want to export. 2. Click Export connectivity > From file to export to a .nfs file. 3. Click Export connectivity > From clipboard to export to a selection on the clipboard.
196
Related Topics
o
Importing Connectivity from an nfs File

You many options available for adding nets to components in ICT blocks.
Procedures
Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically When Placing a Component Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically After Placing the Symbol Adding Nets Manually to an ICT Component Adding Nets to an ICT Block with Advanced Connect
Related Topics
Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically When Placing a Component

You can have the spreadsheet automatically populate nets for each pin when you place a component.
Prerequisite
DxDataBook must be open to the CL View tab for adding components. See Adding Components to an ICT Block.
Procedure
1. Enable the Add Nets check box at the right end of the Symbol View pane before placing the component. By default the nets are named according to their database identifiers. You can have the nets named according to the pin names by enabling the Add Net Names check box. If you do not enable the Add Nets check box, you can add nets to pins after you place them.
Related Topics
197
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Creating an ICT Design o
Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically After Placing the Symbol
Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically After Placing the Symbol

You can have the spreadsheet automatically create nets for selected components after you have placed them if you did not have them created automatically during placement.
Prerequisite
A component must exist on the ICT block without nets attached to the pins. See Adding Components to an ICT Block.
Procedure
1. Select the component you want to add nets to. 2. Add the nets with Edit > Add Nets To Pins. New net rows appear for each new net. The net names are the same as the pin names they are attached to. Connectivity is automatically established in the cell where the net row and the pin column intersect. Warnings appear in the Output window for already existing nets. Cross probing is enabled between the Output window and the table.
Related Topics
o
Adding Nets to an ICT Component Automatically When Placing a Component
Adding Nets Manually to an ICT Component

You can add nets to pins manually at any time after you have placed the component.
Prerequisite
Net rows must already exist from previously placed components, or added with Add > Net. See Adding Components to an ICT Block.
Procedure
1. Double-click the cell at the intersection of the net row and the component column. A list box appears with the pins available for connecting to that net. 2. Select a name from the dropdown list. A connection symbol,
198
, appears in the cell. See the example below.

Note: Expand the component column so each of its pins has a column of its own. If you do so, a double-click in the cell at the intersection of the net row and pin column results in a connection. 3. If the pin names end in incremented numbers, such as IN1, IN2, IN3, and so on, you can connect the first pin then drag the bottom-right corner of the cell outline as many rows as you want. Each increment of pin number gets connected to the next row. See example below.
Related Topics
199
Example
1) A double-click in the cell at the intersection of the IN1 row and AND3 column opens a list box of available nets. Notice the red circle with the yellow x showing that the component has unconnected pins. 2) Select IN1 as the pin to connect to net IN1. Expand the pins by clicking the expand arrow (circled in red) next to the component symbol. Notice the unconnected pins Notice the connection symbol at the intersection of the net row and pin column. The unconnected symbol is missing from the connected pin.
3) Click the square in the lower-right corner of the cell outline (circled in red) and drag it across the next two rows. When you release the mouse button, the nets are automatically connected to the pins.
200
4) Double-click the cell at the intersection of the OUTPUT net row and OUTPUT pin column. The connection appears. Now all pins are connected, and no unconnected symbols appear on either the component or the pins.
Adding Nets to an ICT Block with Advanced Connect

The Advanced Connect tool allows you to connect, by name, multiple components with common pins. From the Advanced Connect dialog, you can do the following: Rename nets (which you cant do from the Add Nets to Pins command). Select nets by clicking and dragging, as in the ICT Automatically add hierarchical ports
Procedure
1. Select the component you want to connect. 2. Open the Add nets with ports dialog box with Edit > Advanced Connect. 3. Select the nets you want to connect in the dialog box. 4. Select the type of net you want to view from the Directions filter dropdown list. 5. Click Generate Nets 6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating and Removing a Differential Pair

The differential pair command is available only when the nets are either not connected, or are connected between blocks. Differential pairs created in ICT automatically appear in the Constraint Editor System (CES).
201
Procedures
Create a differential pair with Edit > Create DiffPair. Create Diffpair creates the second net in the pair automatically, and adds the extensions _p and _n to the nets in the pair. Remove a differential pair with Edit > Revert from DiffPair.
Related Topics
Adding a Bus in an ICT Block

When you add a bus to an ICT block, a new net row appears. You can connect multiple pins to the same row if it is a bus row.
Procedure
Add a bus with Add > Bus.
Related Topics
o
Ripping a Bus or Subset of Nets from ICT Bus
Ripping a Bus or Subset of Nets from ICT Bus

Rip a bus when you need to make a net row out of one of the nets in the bus.
Procedure
1. Select the bus you want to rip. 2. Rip the bus with Edit > Rip Nets. The bus name shows up in an editable row. 3. Enter the list of net names you want to rip from the bus. For example; to rip nets D0-D3, enter D[0:3]. To rip nets D0 and D2, enter D0 D2.
Result
A new row appears for each net you specified to rip.
Related Topics
202
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Creating an ICT Design o
Adding a Bus in an ICT Block
Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block

You can add multiple layers of hierarchy to an ICT block, both with top-down and bottom-up design methodologies. You can collapse all the components under a block so only the block is visible in the spreadsheet.
Prerequisites
The ICT block to which you want to add hierarchy must be open in DxDesigner.
Procedure
For top-down methodology, add a layer of hierarchy as follows: a. Add a block with Add > Block. b. Create an underlying schematic or ICT with either Edit > Push Schematic or Edit > Push ICT. A new block appears in the hierarchy with a new sub-block. For bottom-up methodology, add a layer of hierarchy as follows: a. Select the bottom level component or block you want the new level of hierarchy to be above. b. Add the layer of hierarchy with Edit > Re-Level. A new block column appears to the left of the selected component or block.
Results
You are now ready to add ports to connect the hierarchy.
Related Topics
o o o o
203
Adding Ports to an ICT Block

Add ports to an ICT block to establish connectivity from the parent levels of hierarchy to the child levels of hierarchy.
Prerequisites
Ports must be defined in your special components file. See Configuring Special Components.
Procedure
1. Select the block to which you want to add a port. 2. Add the port with Add > Port > port type > specific port. 3. A small black arrow appears near the block symbol to show that ports have been created.
Related Topics
Adding Hierarchy to an ICT Block
Example
1. Select the block to which you want to add a port (Block2). 2. Add an input port with Add > Port > IN > input port. A new column appears to the left of Block2 as shown below.
3. Enter the name of the port (In_Port1) and press Enter.

204
A new net row appears with the same name as the port and a connection established in the cell at the intersection of the new row and the port column as shown below.
4. Double-click the cell at the intersection of the new net row and the Block2 column. A list box appears with the available port types.
5. Select the port type. The cell shows the port type. A new net row appears with the same name as the port but with the name of the child block (Block2) rather than the parent block (Block1).
6. Double-click the cell at the intersection of the new net row and the component pin (IN1).
205
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet
A connection appears in the cell as shown below.
7. Repeat the process for the other pins on the component (assuming all the signal nets come from or go to the parent block). In the figure below, all the ports are available to both the parent and child levels of the hierarchy. Notice all the pins of the component are connected. Note: the Block1 port columns are collapsed under Block1.
Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet

You can adjust the ICT spreadsheet to make it easier to work with a large number of columns and rows.
Procedures
Setting ICT Color Preferences
206
Grouping and Ungrouping ICT Rows and Columns Adjusting ICT Row and Column Width Hiding and Showing ICT Rows and Columns Splitting and Recombining an ICT
Related Topics
Setting ICT Color Preferences

You can change the colors that designate the cells for different elements of an ICT.
Procedure
1. Open the Setup > Settings > Display Objects window. 2. Select the ICT option under Preview to see the current color scheme. 3. Click on any cell in the Color column of the Objects table to bring up a color pallet for the object associated with that cell. 4. Select a color for that object from the color pallet. 5. Click Apply. Note The changes are preserved from session to session, but you can save a set of changes to a scheme for later selection by clicking Save Scheme and entering a filename for the scheme. Reload a saved scheme by clicking Load Scheme.
Related Topics
Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet Display - Objects - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Grouping and Ungrouping ICT Rows and Columns

Group net rows or component columns to condense the space they take up on the spreadsheet.
Procedure
1. Select the group of rows or columns you want to group. 2. Group with Format > Group.
207
A new row or column appears with a default name highlighted for you to change. The selected rows or columns are collapsed under the new row or column. Expand the group with the + symbol to view the items of the group.
3. To ungroup, select the item or items you want to remove from the group and ungroup with Format > Ungroup.
Related Topics
Adjusting ICT Row and Column Width

You can adjust the row height and column width in the following ways:
Procedures
Double-click the right edge of any column or the bottom edge of any row. The row or column automatically resizes to fit the name of the net or component. Click and drag the right edge of any column or the bottom edge of any row to manually resize the column or row. Select a column or row and resize automatically with Format > Autofit.
Related Topics
Hiding and Showing ICT Rows and Columns

You can hide, show and unhide multiple rows and columns to make the spreadsheet easier to manipulate as described below:
Procedures
Hide selected rows or columns with Format > Hide. The rows or columns disappear from the spreadsheet. The Hide icon, upper-left corner of the spreadsheet. , appears in the
Slice & Dice: Inverse of hide. Removes all rows or columns except the selected rows or columns from view. The rows or columns disappear from the spreadsheet. The Hide icon, upper-left corner of the spreadsheet. , appears in the
208
Show Hidden: Click the Hide icon and select Show Hidden.
All the hidden rows or columns appear, but they are uneditable. Unhide: Click the Hide icon and select Unhide All. All the hidden rows or columns appear in the spreadsheet.
Related Topics
Splitting and Recombining an ICT

You can split an interconnectivity table horizontally or vertically to view two sections of a large spreadsheet at once.
Procedures
1. Click either the horizontal or vertical split selector as shown in the figure below and drag it to create a split window. 2. Combine split windows by dragging the separator back to the top or left of the window.
Related Topics
209
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Printing an ICT Block
Printing an ICT Block

You can print an ICT block to either the printer or to a PDF. With either method you can print the ICT either as a spreadsheet or a bitmap of a schematic that includes the ICTs components and nets. If you choose the schematic, the components appear in a best-guess location, but the placement is not editable. Note If the ICT contains symbols that do not have graphics, such as blocks created in ICT, then the PDF will contain empty sheets for those symbols
Procedures
Print to the printer with File > Print. The Print dialog box appears. If you want to print the ICT as a schematic, enable the Options > Convert ICTs to schematics check box. Print the ICT block to a PDF file with File > Export > DxPDF. The DxPDF dialog box appears. If you want to create the PDF with the ICT block as a schematic, enable the Change ICTs to schematics check box.
Related Topics
Interconnectivity Table Viewer

Use the ICT viewer to view a schematic block in table form without converting it to an ICT block. You cannot edit the spreadsheet when viewing an ICT block with the ICT viewer. To convert a schematic block to an ICT block so you can edit the spreadsheet, see Converting a Schematic Block to an ICT Block. In addition to viewing ICT block components, you can also view net properties and symbol properties. You can modify net or symbol properties on a cell-by-cell basis. You can toggle the properties that appear in the table in the Setup > Settings > Interconnectivity Table > Properties window.
Prerequisite
The schematic that you want to view in spreadsheet form must be open in DxDesigner.
210
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Interconnectivity Table Viewer
Procedure
1. Open the ICT viewer with View > ICT Viewer. 2. Select a tab for the type if information you want to view. Hierarchy: View the schematic in spreadsheet form. Net Properties: View the schematics nets in spreadsheet form. Symbol Properties: View the Schematics symbols and their properties in spreadsheet form.
You can adjust the ICT viewer spreadsheet with the same controls for adjusting the ICT spreadsheets as described in the topic Adjusting the ICT Spreadsheet.
Related Topics
211
Creating Designs Within a Spreadsheet Interconnectivity Table Viewer
212
Chapter 6 Building Hierarchical Designs

Use hierarchical designs to segment your design into manageable layers, and to reuse sections of circuits at various parts of the design. Hierarchical designs provide an efficient way of using the same circuit multiple times without re-drawing it for each use. Instead, you create a hierarchical block, and change the underlying schematics properties for each instance. In a concurrent design environment, hierarchical designs let multiple people work on different parts of the design, and assemble them. Figure 6-1 shows the difference between flat and hierarchical designs. Figure 6-1. Contrasting a Flat Design and a Hierarchical Design
Flat Design
Hierarchical Design
213
Building Hierarchical Designs Hierarchical Design Methodologies
Procedures
Related Topics
Hierarchical Design Methodologies Propagating Properties Hierarchically Building a Schematic
Hierarchical Design Methodologies

You can create hierarchical designs either from the bottom up, or from the top down. You choose a methodology based on the working style of your company or the requirements of your project. After you have created a hierarchical design, you can edit the blocks it contains, as well as the design itself.
Bottom-up design
When you build hierarchy from the bottom up, you start by creating a schematic or spreadsheet. This schematic or spreadsheet can have one or many sheets. You then generate a high-level composite block from the schematic. You can re-use this block by placing it multiple times on your design, assigning unique hierarchical properties to the underlying schematic for each occurrence.
Top-down design
You use top-down design when you want to create an abstract design and then fill in the details. For example, you can divide the work between a system designer and a circuit designer. The system designer designates I/O for a black box hierarchical block, for which the circuit designer later creates the underlying schematic. When the circuit designer has created and tested the underlying schematic, its associated black box block is transformed into a composite block.
Requirement
In both top-down and bottom-up hierarchical designs, you must link the levels together in the following ways: Associate a block and its underlying schematic by giving both the same name.
214
Building Hierarchical Designs Hierarchical Design Methodologies
Connect block pins to underlying schematic nets using a special component called a port.
Procedures
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down Working Within Hierarchical Designs
Related Topics
Ports Hierarchical Blocks
Hierarchical Blocks
Hierarchical blocks are containers for hierarchy. In top-down design, you create the hierarchical block and then populate it with a schematic or spreadsheet. In a bottom-up design, you create the schematic or spreadsheet and create a higher-level block from it. Hierarchical blocks created by either methodology appear in the [local symbols] section of the DxDataBook window > CL View tab. To complete a hierarchical design, you place hierarchical blocks on the top-level schematic or board of your design connect them, and assign instance values of properties for each block.
Procedures
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down Propagating Properties Editing Local Blocks Propagating Properties Hierarchically
Related Topics
Ports Building Hierarchical Designs
215
Building Hierarchical Designs Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the BottomUp

When you create a bottom up block, you start with a schematic. You then create a block above the schematic by either generating it automatically or building it manually. Once you have created the hierarchical block, you can instance it multiple times in your design, and assign property values for each instance of the block you place.
Prerequisites
You have already created the schematic that you want to make into a block. See Building a Schematic
Procedures
Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Bottom-up Block Generating a Block from a Schematic Generating a Block From an Entire Schematic Extracting a Block From a Portion of a Schematic Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic Editing Local Block Pins and Properties Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down
Related Topics
Ports Building Hierarchical Designs
o o
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up
Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Bottom-up Block

You prepare a schematic for generation of a higher-level block by adding ports to schematic nets. Each port will correspond to a pin on the generated block.
Prerequisite
Before you add ports to a schematic, you must configure the ports as special components. See Configuring Special Components for instructions.
216
Procedure
1. Select Add > Special Components or click the 2. Select the port type from the dropdown list. 3. Move the cursor on the schematic to point where you want to port to appear and leftclick. Continue left-clicking for as many ports as you need. Right-click will stop the port-insertion. 4. Connect a port to an associated net by dragging and dropping the port onto the dangling net symbol. button.
Related Topics
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Generating a Block from a Schematic
Replacing Port Graphics

You can change the graphic you use to replace a port by changing the symbol.
Related Topics
Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Bottom-up Block Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block
o o
Automatically Adding Missing Ports Manually Adding Missing Ports
Generating a Block from a Schematic

You can generate a block from an entire schematic using the Generate Symbol tool, or by extracting it from a portion of a schematic.
Procedures
Generating a Block From an Entire Schematic Extracting a Block From a Portion of a Schematic
Related Topics
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic
217
Generating a Block From an Entire Schematic

Generate a higher-level block from a schematic using the Generate Block tool when you want the entire schematic to be represented by the block.
Procedure
1. Open the schematic you want to use as the source of the symbol. 2. Select Tools > Generate Block Symbol. 3. Fill in the Generate Symbol dialog box. See Generate Symbol Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for descriptions of each option.
Related Topics
Generating a Block from a Schematic Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic
Extracting a Block From a Portion of a Schematic

Extract a block from a schematic when you want only a portion of the schematic circuit to be represented by the block.
Procedure
1. Open the schematic from which you want to extract a block. Tip: You can extract a block from a schematic at any level of hierarchy. The extracted block will be placed one level of hierarchy below the schematic from which you extract it. 2. Click Add > Block. 3. Drag-select the section of the schematic you want to use. 4. Enter the name of the block you are creating, and select the Extract schematic checkbox. 5. Click OK.
Results
DxDesigner moves all selected objects to a new schematic, which become the contents of the newly created block. The block appears in place of the selected circuitry. It also appears in the navigator, and as a new tab in the Schematic Editor window. If nets or buses cross the drag-select border, one of the following will happen:
218
Building Hierarchical Designs Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down o
If you have defined ports in the Setup, the appropriate pins on the block, and ports on the underlying schematic, are created and are connected automatically. If you have not defined ports, you must add the ports manually. See Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block
Related Topics
Generating a Block from a Schematic
o
Generating a Block From an Entire Schematic
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down

A block is a hierarchical symbol that contains underlying design data. A block can represent a schematic, an Interconnect Table (ICT), or a VHDL/Verilog model. Once a block is placed on a schematic sheet, you can automatically connect nets to the block & create block pins, unless the block is frozen.
Procedures
Creating Blocks Adding Nets and Pins to a Block Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block Editing Local Blocks
Related Topics
Hierarchical Blocks Building Hierarchical Designs
Creating Blocks
Place blocks on the top-level schematic as placeholders for underlying schematics that you will associate with those blocks later. For example, you may be creating a high-level architecture and design flow while others are working on design details.
Procedure
1. Select Add > Block or click the toolbar button. When you use the Add > Block command, DxDesigner graphically creates an inner and outer box for each block. The box color that you specify in Setup > Settings > Display > Objects for the Box object determines the color of the block.
219
Building Hierarchical Designs Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down
2. Left-click an area of the schematic to define the starting point for the block, and drag the mouse to define the block area. 3. Enter the block name in the Add Block dialog box. If you do not enter a name, the block is not added to the drawing. 4. Click OK. The block appears as a symbol shell in the design. Note You can resize a block by clicking and dragging a corner of the symbol shell.
Related Topics
o o
Adding Nets and Pins to a Block Freezing and Unfreezing Blocks
Adding Nets and Pins to a Block

Add nets and pins to blocks to connect it to other blocks and library symbols to the top level design. Block pins correspond to ports on underlying schematics.
Prerequisite
Select Setup > Settings > Advanced. 1. Select the Begin Nets in space checkbox
Procedure
Do one of the following: Starting in space or at another block or library symbol, draw a net to the bounding box of a block. Draw an entire net or bus in space, and then drag it to the outer bounding box of the block.
Note: You can optionally name the net or bus.
Results
When the net reaches the edge of the block, a pin appears block, connected to the net, If you have named the net or bus, the pin has the same name as the connecting net.
220
Note Creating or deleting a block pin clears the schematics Undo and Redo stacks, disabling the operation of these commands. When you delete a net or bus segment that is attached to a block pin, DxDesigner automatically deletes the block pin.
Related Topics
o o
Placing a Block in an Open Schematic Editing Local Blocks
Deleting Pins from a Block

When you delete a pin from a block, you can automatically remove the corresponding port from the underlying schematic.
Procedure
1. Select the block from which the pin has been removed. 2. Right-click > Push Schematic Result: DxDesigner deletes the corresponding port from the underlying schematic, and reports the deletion in the output window. DxDesigner does not delete the net attached to the port. You must do so manually. Caution If the block and underlying schematic are displayed simultaneously in tabs, clicking the tab for the underlying schematic does not delete the port.
Related Topics
Editing a Local Symbol
Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block

The pins in a hierarchical block must connect to corresponding nets in the underlying schematic. You create this connection by terminating the nets in the underlying schematic with special components called ports. This process is known as adding missing ports. You can add missing ports two ways:
221
Automatically, by pushing into the underlying schematic. from the higher-level block. The automatic method functions only the first time you push into the schematic. It places all the missing ports to the first sheet of the underlying schematic. Use this method when you have a single-sheet schematic with only a few ports, or when you use only one special component to represent each port type. Manually, using the Add Missing Ports dialog box. This method lets you select which sheet(s) of a schematic you will add ports to, and which special component you will use to represent each port.
Procedures
Automatically Adding Missing Ports Manually Adding Missing Ports
Automatically Adding Missing Ports

Use the automatic method for adding missing ports when you have a single-sheet underlying schematic, or when you have only one symbol configured for each port direction.
Rule
Use the automatic method the first time you push into the underlying schematic. If you add ports to the Block after you use the automatic method, you must use the manual method to place them in the underlying schematic.
Prerequisite
You must configure DxDesigner for the port symbol you want to use. See Configuring Special Components
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Advanced (Category). 2. Select the Automatically Propagate Ports to Schematic checkbox. 3. Right-click > Push Schematic.
Results
DxDesigner pushes to the underlying schematic for the selected block, and places an unconnected port corresponding to each symbol pin to the first sheet. Port direction depends on the pintype of the block pin. By default, pintypes correspond to the location of the pin on the block, where left and top are inputs, and right and bottom are outputs. However, you can change the pintype by editing the local block.
222
Related Topics
Editing a Local Symbol Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic Replacing Port Graphics
Manually Adding Missing Ports

Use the manual method for adding ports when your underlying schematic has multiple sheets or when you have more than one symbol configured for each port direction. You also use this method when you add pins to an existing hierarchical block that already has ports on its underlying schematic.
Prerequisites
You must configure DxDesigner for the port symbols you want to use. See Configuring Special Components
Procedure
1. Select Setup > Settings > Advanced (Category) 2. Clear the Automatically Propagate Ports to Schematic checkbox. 3. For each sheet to which you want to add ports, do the following: a. From the Navigator open the high-level sheet that contains the block you want to connect. b. Select the block, then Right-click > Push Schematic. c. Within the lower-level schematic, navigate to the sheet to which you want to add ports. Note: you can navigate directly to the sheet using the Navigator. d. Select Add > Missing Ports. e. Select the checkbox for each port type you want to add, then click the schematic. The port graphic attaches to the cursor. f. Left-click to place the port.
223
Building Hierarchical Designs Working Within Hierarchical Designs
Note Use the Filter pulldown to display All ports, unassigned ports, or assigned ports. To change the port graphic, click the symbol column for the port type you are adding, and select a new graphic from the pulldown. You can assign the same port on multiple sheets. This is useful when you want a block pin to connect to a net, such as a clock, that is used throughout the design.The placed column shows the sheet on which the port appears.
Related Topics
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Block
o
Automatically Adding Missing Ports
Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Bottom-Up Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Bottom-up Block
o
Replacing Port Graphics
Working Within Hierarchical Designs

After you have assembled your hierarchical design, you can perform a number of tasks independently of whether the design was produced by bottom-up or top-design methodology.
Placing a Block in an Open Schematic

Whether generated from a schematic (bottom-up) or created as the top level and associated with an underlying schematic (top-down), you can place a block multiple times in a design, editing properties to make them unique for the instance.
Procedure
1. Open the DxDataBook window with the View > DxDataBook pulldown menu item. 2. Select the CL View tab. 3. You can scroll through the list of symbols or filter the list by entering a string in a field above a column that matches the symbol you are looking for. 4. Select the symbol you want. An image of that symbol appears on the right side of the DxDataBook window, the CL View tab. 5. Choose whether or not you want nets and/or net names to appear on the symbol.
224
6. Click the Place Symbol button. 7. Place the mouse cursor in the schematic window. An outline of the symbol you are placing appears at the cursor. 8. Click the RMB in the location where you want to place the symbol. You can click multiple times in multiple locations to place more than one symbol. 9. Press the <Esc> key to stop the place symbol action.
Related Topics
1. Browse to the Central Library partition into which you want to place the symbol.
Related Topics
Editing Local Blocks

You can edit local blocks by changing pin configurations and properties. You can also edit the graphical representation of a local block.
Prerequisite
Confirm that the block you want to edit is in unfrozen state. See Freezing and Unfreezing Blocks
Procedures
Editing Local Block Pins and Properties Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic
Related Topics
Freezing and Unfreezing Blocks

Freeze blocks to make them read-only, and unfreeze blocks to make them editable.
225
When you create a block, its default state is unfrozen. When you freeze a block, nets that you subsequently draw to the block do not automatically create and attach pins.
Procedure
1. Select a block. 2. Either right-click > Freeze or right-click > Unfreeze.
Related Topics
Editing Local Blocks Creating Hierarchical Blocks From the Top Down
o o
Placing a Block in an Open Schematic Adding Nets and Pins to a Block
Editing Local Block Pins and Properties

You can edit a local blocks contents whether or not it has been placed on a schematic.
Procedure
1. Select the symbol by doing one of the following: Select View > DxDataBook to open the DxDataBook window, then in the CL View tab select the symbol you want to edit from the [local symbols] partition. Within the schematic, select the generated symbol you want to edit.
2. Right-click > Edit Local Symbol. The Symbol Editor opens. 3. Use the Symbol Editor to edit the symbol. Also see the DxDesigner Symbol Editor manual.
Related Topics
Creating an Enhanced Block Graphic

You can create a local symbol for the low-level schematic when you want a more complex or descriptive symbol than the standard rectangle that represents a block. Procedure 1. Open DxDesigner on the desired project.
226
Building Hierarchical Designs Propagating Properties Hierarchically
2. Open the low-level Block that you will want to place on the high-level sheet. 3. Click File > New > Local Symbol. The Symbol Editor opens. 4. Edit your symbol as needed and save it. (See Creating a Local Symbol for more details.) You must manually add the ports to match those on the related schematic sheet. 5. Close the Symbol Editor. This local symbol is now available in the DxDesigner DxDataBook windows CL View tab (View > DxDataBook).
Related Topics
Adding the Enhanced Block to the Top-Level Design

After you have created the enhanced graphic for the block, you add it to the top-level design. Functionally, this enhanced block behaves exactly like a block represented by the default graphic.
Procedure
1. In DxDesigner, display the top-level sheet where you will add the newly-created symbol. 2. From the DxDataBook windows CL View tab (View > DxDataBook), find the local symbol you created and select it. 3. Drag-and-drop the symbol to the schematic sheet.
Related Topics
Propagating Properties Hierarchically

You can automatically propagate properties down the design hierarchy before you package. Although you can propagate properties from the top level of hierarchy, you may find it particularly useful when you need to re-propagate one or more components added inside an existing blocks hierarchy. For more information about properties, see Specifying the Characteristics of Components.
227
Procedures
Configuring Hierarchical Propagation Propagating Properties
Related Topics
Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins Building Hierarchical Designs
Configuring Hierarchical Propagation

When you propagate properties hierarchically, you can control how to handle duplicate properties, and to specify visibility of the propagated properties.
Procedures
Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties
Related Topics
Propagating Properties Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins Building Hierarchical Designs
Propagating Properties
By using the Propagation Control Properties, you can specify in advance which properties need to be propagated, and do so with one click. You can control which properties and which values are propagated, where in the hierarchy to start the propagation, and where to finish it. You can exclude individual components from being propagated. You can also control visibility of the properties and whether duplicate properties are overwritten or preserved.
Prerequisites
Install the property propagation script. See Installing the Property Propagation Script. Specify the visibility of propagated properties. See Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties. Specify how you want to handle duplicate properties during propagation. See Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties.
228
Procedure
1. Assign Propagation Control Properties to control which properties are propagated, and at which levels to start and end propagation for each. 2. Click or select Edit > Propagate Properties Hierarchically.
Result
DxDesigner adds or changes all designated properties and values down through the hierarchy.
Related Topics
Propagation Control Properties Propagating Properties Hierarchically Building Hierarchical Designs Specifying the Characteristics of Components Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins
Propagation Control Properties

DxDesigner uses two Propagation properties to control hierarchical propagation: PropThruHier StopPropThruHier
PropThruHier
Description: Place on hierarchical blocks to specify which block properties to propagate. Place at the level of hierarchy at which you want to start propagation. Syntax: PropThruHier=Name1=Value1|Name2=Value2|...NameN=ValueN|NameOnly1|NameOnly2|... NameOnlyN Parameters: Name is the name of the block property to be propagated. Use the Name=Value syntax to propagate using the specified Value. Otherwise, the block symbol value is used. Use the NameOnly syntax to propagate using the block value. Name=Value and NameOnly syntax may be mixed.
229
Example 1: Propagating an existing property In this example, you want to propagate two properties that exist on the block: This=UART That=CPU
You place the following on the block:

PropThyrHier=This|That
Example 2: Adding and propagating a new property In this example, you want to add the same two properties and their values to a block, and then propagate them. You place the following on the block:
PropThruHier=This=UART|That=CPU
StopPropThruHier
Description: Place on hierarchical blocks, or symbols within blocks, at the level of hierarchy at which you want to stop propagation of specified properties. For example you would assign StopPropThruHier to capacitors or resistors to create and exception, preventing propagated properties from being assigned to them. Syntax: StopPropThruHier=Name1|Name2|Name3|...|NameN Parameters: Name is the name of the block property to stop propagating.
Related Topics
Propagating Properties Hierarchically
o
Propagation Control Properties Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties Adding or Changing Properties on Multiple Nets, Components, or Pins
Installing the Property Propagation Script

Before you can propagate properties hierarchically, you must install the property propagation script that is provided with DxDesigner. Once you install the script, you can run it from the DxDesigner toolbar or menu.
230
Procedure
1. Open DxDesigner. You do not need to open a project. 2. Select Setup > Settings > Run on Startup. 3. In the Scripts area, click to add a new script.
4. In your install tree, navigate to SDD_HOME\standard\prop_reuse\prop_reuse_gui.vbs, and then click Open. 5. Click OK to save the setting and close the Settings dialog box. 6. Close and restart DxDesigner. The script loads when DxDesigner restarts.
Related Topics
Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties

By default, Name and Value are visible on propagated properties. Use the following procedure to change these defaults: 1. With any text editor, open the file: <Install_drive:>\<\install_folder>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\prop_reuse\prop _reuse_core.vbs. 2. Set the newPropertyVisibility keyword as follows: 0 = Invisible 1 = Name and value visible (default) 2 = Name only visible 3 = Value only visible
Related Topics
Propagating Properties Hierarchically Propagation Control Properties Configuring Hierarchical Propagation
o
Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties
231
Handling Duplicate Propagated Properties

By default, duplicated properties are overwritten during propagation. Use this procedure to change these defaults.
Procedure
1. With any text editor, open the file: <Install_drive:>\<\install_folder>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\prop_reuse\prop _reuse_core.vbs. 2. Set the newPropertyDuplicate keyword as follows: 0 = Add new property regardless of duplicates 1 = If property with this name exists, replace it (default)
Related Topics
Propagating Properties Hierarchically Configuring Hierarchical Propagation
o
Specifying the Visibility of Propagated Properties
232
Chapter 7 Specifying the Characteristics of Components

You define logical component characteristics using properties, and physical design rules using Constraints. When constraints mode is enabled for a design, you can assign constraints defined within classes to nets, components, and differential pair nets on a schematic.
Procedures
Adding and Editing Properties Handling Mechanical Parts Handling Test Points
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner Adding Symbols to a Schematic
Adding and Editing Properties

In a Netlist workflow, you can create and edit properties with the Property Definition Editor from the Tools > Property Definition Editor menu. For more information see Defining Properties in the Netlist Workflow on page 238. When you place a symbol on your design, you can select which of the symbol properties to use, then add or edit them within DxDesigner using the Properties window. The Properties window can be toggled on and off by selecting the View > Properties menu item or clicking the button. You can also display the Properties window by double-clicking an object, or you can select an object and Right-click > Properties. You control property and value visibility with the following order of precedence, with 1 having the highest precedence and 3 the lowest: 1. Component level settings (when placed on the schematic) 2. Symbol level settings (assigned by the librarian) 3. Property Definition Editor level settings
233
Specifying the Characteristics of Components Adding and Editing Properties
With the Properties window you can assign names to schematics, sheets, properties, nets, and buses, see Name Characteristics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for naming rules. For editing purposes, there are three types of properties. The rules for editing them appear in Table 7-1. Table 7-1. Property Editing Rules Property Type Symbol Property Added by the librarian to the symbol Component Property Added by the user to the placed component System Property Added by the tool Example Partition Description Editing Actions Allowed Change Values Change values Delete None
Id
Procedures
Adding a Property Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status Changing the Value of a Component Property Deleting Editable Properties Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy
Related Topics
Reference Designator Control Properties Specifying the Characteristics of Components
o o o
Adding and Editing Properties Handling Mechanical Parts Handling Test Points
Defining Properties in the Netlist Workflow

o
Creating a User-Defined Property
234
Adding a Property
Add a property when the default properties for the selected component do not suit your design requirements.
Procedure
1. If the Properties window is not visible, double-click the object you want to add the property to. Tip: You can select multiple objects using the <Ctrl> key. 2. Click the empty box at the bottom of the Property column (see figure below). A list of available properties appears.
3. From the available list, select the property you want to add. 4. In the associated column, enter the value you want to assign to the property.
Related Topics
Reference Designator Control Properties Adding and Editing Properties
o o o o o
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status Changing the Value of a Component Property Changing, Adding or Deleting the Instance Value of a Property Deleting Editable Properties Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy
235
Reference Designator Control Properties

Reference Designator control properties specify how DxDesigner uses Reference Designators during packaging. These properties are: RefDes Prefix RefDes Suffix RefDes Start RefDes Incr Note You can only assign one Reference Designator control property. If you try to assign an additional property, DxDesigner deletes the existing one.
Related Topic
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status

Change the visibility status when you wish to either add or remove the value from the schematic window.
Procedure
In the Properties window, select or clear the checkbox in the Property or Value field.
Related Topics
o o o o
Adding a Property Changing the Value of a Component Property Deleting Editable Properties Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy
Changing the Value of a Component Property

Change the value of the component property to modify it for your design requirements.
Procedure
1. Select the component whose property value you want to change.
236
2. In the Properties window, click on the property value to select it and type the new value.
Related Topics
o o o o
Adding a Property Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status Deleting Editable Properties Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy
Changing, Adding or Deleting the Instance Value of a Property

You may want to change the value of a property for a particular instance of a symbol within the hierarchy.
Procedure
1. In the Navigator, select the symbol for which you want to change the instance value. The symbol appears in the Editor window. 2. Double-click symbol to open the Properties window. 3. Do one of the following: a. To add an instance value, right-click the property whose value you want to change and select Add Instance Value. b. To change an instance value, select the instance value field of the property you want to change, and enter the new value. 4. To delete an instance value, right-click the property whose value you want to change and select Delete Instance Value.
Deleting Editable Properties

Delete an editable property to remove it from the selected components properties list. Deleting a property only removes it from your Properties window for the selected component. It does not remove it from your library, nor from other placed instances of the component. If the property is not editable, the Delete Property popup menu item is grayed out.
Procedure
In the Properties window, move the cursor over the property and Right-click >Delete Property. You might need to turn off visibility before you can delete the property.
237
Related Topics
o o o o
Adding a Property Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status Changing the Value of a Component Property Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy
Propagating the Value of a Property Throughout the Hierarchy

For more information on propagating properties, see Propagating Properties Hierarchically.
Procedure
In the Properties window, move the cursor over the property and Right-click > Propagate Through Hierarchy.
Related Topics
o o o o
Adding a Property Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status Changing the Value of a Component Property Deleting Editable Properties

Use the Property Definition Editor to define the available properties and their format. Use this editor to define new properties, define property types and their associated syntax, and change certain aspects of pre-defined system properties. The values of the properties are stored on the data objects and are not defined in the Property Definition Editor. User-defined properties are used to add custom information to symbols and parts from DxDesigner. Note System properties cannot be deleted, and user-defined properties are not used by simulation tools.
Procedure
238

Related Topic
Specifying the Characteristics of Components

Create your own property when you need custom control over your components.
Procedure
1. Click Tools > Property Definition Editor. The Property Definition Editor dialog box appears. 2. Click the Advanced button. The dialog box expands to display settings and options associated with the selected property in the Property List. 3. Click the New Property icon list (New Property1). . The software places a new entry at the bottom of the
4. (Optional) Click the Name header to alphabetize the list of property names in the Property List. The list of property names now appear in alphabetical order. Tip: If you click the Name header again, the list of property names would appear in reverse alphabetical order. Click on any column header in the Property List to sort entries in the list. 5. Enter a property name and select a format from the dropdown list. The available options are; Character String, Integer or Real. 6. Select the check box if you want to place the property in the schematic when Packager is used. Packaging can assign properties from the part entries to a symbol in the schematic. For example, if a check is placed next to the System - Cost option (you click OK or Apply), this enables the software to place selected properties in a schematic during the packaging process or when you use the Place Device command to place a device in a schematic file. 7. Use keyin fields and options in the Options applied in Design Entry section of the dialog box to set up all the options that are available in the appropriate property definition file. Regular expression options can be built up from single-characters. For more information see the table titled Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. 8. Attach the selected property by placing a check against one or all of the following: Symbol (default), Pin, or Net. 9. Include the selected property in the property lists for Design Entry (selected by default), 10. Select the Ignore notation settings when displaying property value checkbox to ignore the notations settings. This option is only active when the property format is set to
239
Integer or Real. For example, 0.01 could be displayed as 10m if the option is selected. If the checkbox is not selected, 0.01 would display. 11. (Optional) Click the Import button to Import properties from a file using the Import Properties From File dialog box. You can import properties from either design entry or Parts Database by selecting the appropriate property file name with an extension of .prp. Once you have selected a property file, the available properties within that file are displayed. a. Select the properties you want to import. b. Click Apply to display the selected properties in the Property List of the Property Definition Editor and continue the display of the Import Properties from File dialog box or click OK to dismiss the dialog box and return to the Property Definition Editor. Click Cancel to terminate the operation without updating the Property List and return to the Property Definition Editor dialog box. 12. Click OK.
Related Topic
Handling Mechanical Parts

The Forward To PCB property described in this topic only works for designs created with the Expedition workflow. A mechanical part, such as a socket, bolt, nut, etc. has no electrical significance, and should not appear in the PCB netlist, but it may be placed on the schematic for inclusion during the Part Lister process. Use the following procedure to control whether a component is forwardannotated to the layout tool.
Procedure
1. Right-click the desired symbol on the schematic and choose Properties from the pulldown menu. 2. In the Properties window, locate the Forward To PCB row in the Property column. 3. In the Forward To PCB row, click the Value column as shown in Figure 7-1. A dropdown list appears. You can choose to set this property on the selected component to one of the following: a. Inherit From Definition - This causes the Forward Annotation process to use the setting defined in the symbol definition (either True or False) b. True - Ignore the setting in symbol definition and Forward Annotate this component.
240
c. False - Ignore the setting in symbol definition and do not Forward Annotate this component. Figure 7-1. Forward To PCB Property Example
Related Topics
o o
Adding and Editing Properties Handling Test Points
Handling Test Points

A testpoint is a part that indicates the point of entry for a testing machine. Testpoints should appear in the PCB netlist, since they show electrical constraints that must be noted by manufacturing. However, you may wish to prevent them from showing up in the Part Lister output. Use the following procedure to exclude a particular component from appearing in the Part Lister output.
Procedure
1. Right-click the desired symbol on the schematic and choose Properties from the pulldown menu. 2. In the Properties window, click the blank field at the bottom of the Property column as shown in Figure 7-2. 3. Locate and select the Part List Exclude property (see Figure 7-2). The property is added to the top of the Properties window list for the selected component.
241
Figure 7-2. Part List Exclude Property Example
Related Topics
o o
Adding and Editing Properties Handling Mechanical Parts
Assigning and Editing Constraints with the Constraints Window

(Netlist workflow only) You can assign a collection of constraints defined within a class to nets and components on schematic designs. Constraints correspond to the design rules supported by the PCB layout system you specified for a particular design when you created a new Netlist workflow project. With the Constraints window you can do the following: Specify constraint values for one or more selected nets or components, and then create a class based on the values assigned to a specific object. Assign pre-defined classes to one or more objects, and when desired, specify new values for individual constraints assigned within the class to specific objects. Create differential pair nets and subsequently assign differential pair constraints to these nets.
242
DxDesigner supplies a constraints file in the format <pcb_system_name>.cns for each supported PCB layout system in the \<install_folder>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\isis folder. Multiple users can add net class constraints during design definition. Constraints are stored with the design hierarchy instead of with the schematic, which enables constraint reuse when a design segment is used in multiple places.
Procedure
1. If the Constraint editor is not displayed, select View > Other Windows > Constraints (or click ). 2. Within the opened schematic, select one or more nets or components. The Constraint editor displays a column in the spreadsheet for each selected object, as shown in the example below for PDATA8 (left side) and BRD_ID1 (right side). When the value of PCBCLASS is <Unassigned>, and no other names appear in the list, classes have not yet been defined from the available constraint sets.
Tip: For PADS designs, the PCBCLASS cell displays the name of a pre-defined class called Default. It contains three constraint sets that correspond to High-Speed, Routing, and Clearance design rules (see the tabs at the bottom). The Default class is automatically assigned to all objects in the design that do not have an explicit class assignment other than Default. 3. In the PCBCLASS cell, select the class you want to assign to that object from the list that appears. Alternative: If classes do not exist as indicated when <Unassigned> is the only item in the list, you can create a class as follows: a. Specify values in the cells for the constraints that you want to assign to that object. b. On the Constraints editor toolbar, click Create New Class from Settings c. Specify a name for the class.
243
d. From the object list, select the object whose values you want saved as the class values, and then click OK. 4. After you assign a class to an object, you can specify new values for individual constraints in the class assigned to an object, thus overriding the class default values for these constraints. Result: New constraint values specified within a class for objects appear on the schematic as shown below, indicating that these values override the default values for the same constraints in the base class. Classes assigned to objects also appear on the schematic as shown in the following figure.
Class Assignment Example

The Attribute editor in the example that follows shows the classes assigned to the selected nets IMP_D3 and IMP_D5. The class SLIMTRACK was created by specifying new values for MIN_TRACK_WIDTH and MAX_TRACK_WIDTH, and then creating a new class from these new values. New classes appear in the PCBCLASS list.
244
Example 7-1. Constraint Editor Showing Class Assignments For Two Nets
In the example below, new values were specified for Length Max and Stub Length. New values appear in blue text to distinguish them from the class default values. A new class named NEWCLASS was created from new set of values assigned to the net named BRD_ID0. Example 7-2. NEWCLASS created from new constraint values specified for BRD_ID0
245
246
Chapter 8 Checking the Design

DxDesigner provides the following tools to help you check and verify your design: DxDesigner Diagnostics (accessed from the Tools menu) - Helps to find and correct database inconsistencies stemming from un-expected events during the design process. See Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool. Design Rule Checker (accessed from the Tools > Verify menu) - Helps to detect and locate connectivity, electrical, hierarchy, power and ground, device specific and others rule violations. See Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker.
Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool

The DxDesigner Diagnostics tool allows you to check the design for various scenarios that could compromise data integrity. Some of these scenarios might result from temporary hardware failure like network disconnection, a machine reboot or other similar situations. Others might result from inappropriate usage of the tool. In the concurrent environment, it is a good idea to run this tool at least once when you open the project. If you start DxDesigner on a project that has not yet run the DxDesigner Diagnostics tool before you closed it, you are asked if you want to run it.
Procedure
You can choose to run this tool on the entire database anytime from the Tools > DxDesigner Diagnostics menu. Running it only takes a few seconds. Note You can also set the DxDesigner Diagnostics tool to run when you exit a design from Setup > Settings > (Settings dialog) > DxDesigner Diagnostics (category).
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool Tests DxDesigner Diagnostics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker
247
Checking the Design Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool
DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 8-1 shows the tests that are executed by the DxDesigner Diagnostics tool. Any errors found are displayed in the DxDesigner Output window, in the DxDesigner Diagnostics tab (see Figure 8-1) and also written to a DxDesignerDiagnostics.log file. As shown in Figure 8-1, it is possible to fix the errors found from the Output window. Table 8-1. DxDesigner Diagnostics Tests Checks for Symbol types Description Verifies that pin symbol and port symbol types are not mixed up (symbol cannot be of pin type and port type at the same time). Message: Invalid symbol definition type <name> Verifies that the project does not include sheet-level nets that are not part of any logical net. (Logical nets constitute the connectivity and are displayed in Navigator). Messages: Invalid unconnected net found Invalid net found Invalid buses Verifies that the project does not include buses without graphical data. Message: Invalid bus found Custom sheet order defined in the Navigator is kept in internal properties. Some editing actions could result in this property having incorrect values. It manifests itself only in DxPDF listing sheets incorrectly - not all sheets are listed. Message: Inconsistent sheet ordering data for <name> schematic This checks to validate internal properties that store sheet IDs. Message: Sheet <name> has a missing identifier which is needed to generate object IDs This check finds components without graphical data, meaning only a logical component is present in the database. These components were not visible in DxDesigner, but were still present in CES and Expedition. Message: Components <name> without graphical data found on schematic <name> and need to be deleted
Invalid nets
Sheet order data
Sheet internal identifiers
Component graphical data
248
Table 8-1. DxDesigner Diagnostics Tests (cont.) Checks for Net connections Description Verifies that the project does not include nets connected to nonexistent pins. Message: Net <name> connected to a non-existent pin Some relations between DxDesigner objects are stored on top of the Integrated Common Database (iCDB) in the form of internal properties. The check looks to see if the properties are consistent with underlying iCDB relations. For example, an internal property that lists signals connected with a bus may be inconsistent with actual signals present in the bus. Messages: Ripper refers to non-existent bus, and should be deleted Ripper refers to a signal which is not a member of the bus, the signal reference should be deleted from the rip Reuse blocks Verifies that the reuse blocks instantiated in the design are marked as read-only. Message: Missing read-only flag for block <name> Checks if there are any empty blocks present. If a block (like a schematic or an ICT) is present in the Integrated Common Database (iCDB) without any data, it cannot be opened from Navigator in DxDesigner. Such blocks can be safely deleted since they do not impact connectivity in any way and generally do not contain any data. Message: Empty invalid block <name> found and needs to be deleted
Rippers
Empty blocks
Top level name consistency Verifies that the name of the top level block stored in the project file uses the same case as the name in the database. Message: Block names differ: <name1> in database, <name2> in project file Duplicate internal IDs Symbols in DxDesigner have internal IDs on pins. Those IDs are used in operations like Backup and Rollback to ensure that pins are restored without any ambiguity. If the IDs are duplicated in a given symbol, the symbol is corrupted. The fix assigns unique IDs to pins. Message: Symbol <name> has pins with duplicate IDs needed for Backup/Rollback
249
Table 8-1. DxDesigner Diagnostics Tests (cont.) Checks for Bus signal connections Description It may happen that an element of a bus is shorted in a ripper with another element of the same bus. This check finds such situations and fixes them by removing the shorts. That way a net that is named as an element of a bus is always connected in the ripper with the correct bus member. Message: Invalid connection of <net_name1> to <net_name2> on schematic <sch_name>. This check verifies if component name contains invalid '$' character. The fix removes '$' characters from names. Message: Invalid Component Name(s) <name1>, <name2>, on schematic <sch_name>. This check verifies if components pass-through pins are correctly connected to one logic net and verify if connections to master pin (with flag ForwardPCB) are not repeated. The fix disconnects repeated connections Message: Incorrect connection of pass-through pin to net on schematic This check verifies if schematic sheet graphical data is correctly synchronized with logical data. The fix recompiles schematic graphical data to synchronize with the logical data. Message: Connectivity not up to date with schematic sheet
Component names
Pass-through pins
Connectivity
250
Figure 8-1. DxDesigner Diagnostics Example Output Report
Related Topics
Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool DxDesigner Diagnostics in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
251
Checking the Design Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker
Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker

You verify schematics using the Design Rule Checker, (DRC) as described in this procedure. The DRC is an event driven tool that you use to locate electrical rule violations in your design. You can configure the DRC for your design environment. For more information on the Design Rule Checker options, see the topic DRC (schematic_name) Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. Also see the following topics: Configuring the DRC Locating DRC Defaults Files Configuring the DRC for the Current Project
Prerequisite
Before you run the DRC, the default settings should be configured for your particular use. The DRC defaults-file search rules provide flexibility in how default DRC settings are configured. The topic Design Rule Checker (DRC) Defaults File in the DxDesigner Reference Manual provides the details of how the DRC looks for a defaults file. The topic, Locating DRC Defaults Files, describes the different ways the DRC Defaults file can be created and stored in your file system based on who you want to access a given set of DRC default settings.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Verify or click the toolbar button. 2. Configure the DRC settings for the current project or use the defaults. See Configuring the DRC for the Current Project on page 255. Any settings you change are saved in your project directory in either the Verify.ini file (Expedition workflow) or the NetlistVerify.ini file (Netlist workflow). 3. To execute the chosen checks, click the OK button.
Result
The report, in the format you specified on the Settings tab, appears in the Output window.
Related Topics
Using the DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool
252
Configuring the DRC

You can configure the DRC in one of two ways as described in this procedure:
Procedure
Set up defaults in an appropriately-located NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini file (Netlist Workflow). The location of this file determines if it is used by:
o o o
All users who access a given installation All users who reference the same WDIR path All users who access a given project
For information on how to accomplish each scenario, see Locating DRC Defaults Files. Use the DRC dialog box to modify the current defaults settings. For more information, see Configuring the DRC for the Current Project.
Related Topics
Verifying the Schematic with the Design Rule Checker DRC (schematic_name) Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Locating DRC Defaults Files

The following procedures describes how to locate the DRC defaults file so each project or user accesses the desired set of defaults. Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a WDIR Path Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a Given Project
For information to help you modify the contents of a DRC defaults file, refer to the topic DRC Defaults File Structure in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Related Topics
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users

This procedure shows how to locate the DRC defaults file so that they take effect for all users of a given software installation.
253
Procedure
1. With a text editor, open one of the following files based on the workflow type that is being used: \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini (Expedition workflow) \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist workflow) Note: You may need administrator file permission to access this file. Note: The modifications to the Defaults file in this location will not take effect in a particular DRC session if there is another applicable DRC defaults file in either of the following locations: %WDIR% path Current project directory
2. Edit the file for the desired DRC default settings and save it.
Related Topics
o o
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a WDIR Path Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a Given Project
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a WDIR Path

This procedure shows how to locate the DRC Defaults file so that all users that reference the same WDIR path will use these settings:
Procedure
1. Create a new DRC defaults file by copying an existing file as a starting point such as: \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini (Expedition workflow) \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist workflow) 2. Paste the copied file to a location in the WDIR path. Note: DRC will use the first Defaults file it finds in a WDIR path, so place it accordingly. The left-most entry in a WDIR variable definition has highest precedence. 3. With a text editor, edit the Defaults file you just pasted with the appropriate DRC default settings and save it.
254
Related Topics
o o
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a Given Project
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a Given Project

This procedure shows how to locate the DRC Defaults file so that all users that reference the same project use these settings:
Procedure
1. Create a new DRC defaults file by copying an existing file as a starting point such as: \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini (Expedition workflow) \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist workflow) 2. Paste the copied file into the desired project directory. 3. With a text editor, edit the Defaults file you just pasted with the appropriate DRC default settings and save it.
Related Topics
o o
Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Setting DRC Defaults For All Users Referencing a WDIR Path
Configuring the DRC for the Current Project

If you do not want to run the DRC on the current project with the default settings, you can configure the DRC settings using the DRC dialog box. Your session settings will be saved in a local file called NetlistVerify.ini (Netlist Workflow). Until you reset DRC to the defaults, these settings will persist as long as the .ini file is present for this project. The following procedures show how to configure the DRC for the current project: Specifying How a Schematic is Parsed and How Results Are Reported Configuring the Check Rules
Related Topics
255
Specifying How a Schematic is Parsed and How Results Are Reported

1. Select Tools > Verify or click the toolbar button. 2. In the Settings tab, select the appropriate Check option to specify what DRC will run on. 3. Chose the desired Level Property to limit how far DRC descends into the hierarchy. 4. If you want the resulting report to show hierachical paths, click the box under the Report section.
Related Topics
o
Configuring the Check Rules
Configuring the Check Rules

1. Select Tools > Verify or click the 2. Click the Rules tab. 3. Select the desired rule checks: If you select a group by clicking the checkbox, all the related rules are selected. If you do not want all the rules in a Group, just select the checkbox for the rule(s) you want. toolbar button.
4. If a rule specifies a value, you can edit it by clicking in the Values column for that rule and changing it. 5. If you want to change the severity of a rule, click in the Severity column for the rule and use the pulldown box to make the change. Tip: You can reset either tab by clicking the Defaults button. The Rules tab will revert to the defaults stored in the current DRC defaults
Related Topics
o
Specifying How a Schematic is Parsed and How Results Are Reported
256
Chapter 9 Simulating Designs in DxDesigner

DxDesigner provides interfaces to simulation engines to perform analog, digital, and mixedsignal simulation. For information on the different types of simulation available in DxDesigner and the licenses and simulation engines required to run them, see Simulation Requirements in DxDesigner.
Procedures
Simulating Analog Blocks with HyperLynx Analog Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner Simulating Mixed-Signal Blocks with HyperLynx Analog Netlisting from DxDesigner for Digital Simulation in ModelSim Inserting VHDL, SPICE, and Verilog Files onto a Schematic Simulating Signal Integrity with HyperLynx
Related Topics
Simulation Requirements in DxDesigner

You can simulate analog, digital, and mixed-signal blocks and designs from within DxDesigner provided you have the appropriate simulation engine installer. DxDesigner does not provide a default simulation engine, but it does provide interfaces to simulation engines that perform simulation. See Table 9-1 for a the requirements for each type of simulation.
257
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Simulation Requirements in DxDesigner
Table 9-1. Simulation Requirements in DxDesigner Type of Simulation Analog Simulation Engine License/Simulator Requirements HyperLynx Analog Available as a separately licensed Simulation Engine product when installing DxDesigner. Once installed you must enable the license with Setup > Settings > Licensing > HyperLynx Analog. Eldo HyperLynx Analog must be installed and its license must be enabled. Eldo must be installed as part of an AMS install. Digital ModelSim Requires a ModelSim install. You must provide the path to the directory that contains the ModelSim executable (vsim.exe) in Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation > ModelSim Executable Path. The PADS ES Suite contains the ModelSim Starter Edition. This version of ModelSim appears as the default ModelSim executable. AMS This is essentially a mixed-signal simulation with no analog blocks. See the requirements for mixed-signal simulation. You can bypass the DxDesigner interface and netlist your design. You can then use a stand-alone version of ModelSim to simulate the design from the netlist. HyperLynx Analog must be installed and its license must be enabled. AMS must be installed. EZwave DxDesigner native waveform viewer Waveform Viewer EZwave
EZwave
ModelSim (without DxDesigner interface) MixedSignal AMS
ModelSim native waveform viewer EZwave
Related Topics
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner
o
Simulating Analog Blocks with HyperLynx Analog
258
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner o o o
Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner Simulating Mixed-Signal Blocks with HyperLynx Analog Netlisting from DxDesigner for Digital Simulation in ModelSim
Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner

This task describes the entire process by which you simulate digital blocks in DxDesigner. The first time you try to use the DxDesigner HDL interface, you should run through the HDL Simulation examples. See Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner.
Prerequisites
You must have VHDL or verilog model files attached to your symbols. See Inserting VHDL, SPICE, and Verilog Files onto a Schematic You must have a testbench file ready to simulate the design. See HDL Testbenches.
Procedures
1. Creating an HDL Design 2. Creating an HDL Library 3. Compiling HDL Source Files 4. Initializing Simulation 5. Selecting Signals for the Waveform Viewer 6. Applying Stimuli to Signals Interactively 7. Running Simulation 8. Viewing the Waveforms
Related Topics
Creating an HDL Design

You create an HDL design using the project or block nodes displayed in the Project Navigator.
Prerequisites
HDL files must be available to include in the design. A project must be open in DxDesigner.
259
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Simulating Digital Blocks in DxDesigner
Procedure
1. Create an HDL design with a right-click on either the project name, a schematic name, or a symbol name in the project navigator and click Create HDL Design. A folder called HDL Design appears under the selected design item in the project navigator. Note The level of the design under which you choose to create the HDL Design establishes the scope of the simulation. Choose the project name if you want to simulate the entire design. Choose a schematic if you want to simulate just the schematic and its internal hierarchy. Choose a symbol if you want to simulate just the symbol and its internal hierarchy. 2. Right-click the new HDL Design folder to open the pop-up menu. 3. Add the files, testbenches, or macro *.do files from your source directory with the Add Files popup menu item. You can use multiple selection with the Shift and Ctrl keys for adding multiple files and testbenches. You can add folders for grouping files with the Add Folder menu item; for example, you can keep your testbenches in a folder called TB, and your behavioral source files in a folder called RTL. To filter the source files, select VHDL File (*.vhd), Verilog File (*.v), or Macro File (*.do) from Files of type in the Add File browser. When you have created the HDL Design, the Simulation pulldown menu item becomes active in the main menu bar. Note To view or edit the properties of an HDL design or a file, right-click the item and click Properties. The Properties window opens with the selected items properties available for viewing or editing.
Results
An HDL design project appears in the DxDesigner project innovator along with the source files you have added to the project. You are now ready to create an HDL Library.
Related Topics
260
Creating an HDL Library

You need to create an HDL library for the compiled HDL source files. Once the files are compiled, DxDesigner creates a physical library on your disk which is mapped to the logical library. Note A large, complex digital design may require multiple HDL libraries (the default Work library can be used to store all of the compiled source files).
Prerequisites
The HDL Design must be set up in DxDesigner. See Creating an HDL Design.
Procedure
1. Open the HDL Libraries window using View > Other Windows > HDL Libraries. The left pane shows the library names and their physical location on your disk. The right pane shows the contents or library units of the selected library, which include: Package, package body, entity, architecture, and configuration (VHDL) and module (Verilog). 2. Create a library with a right-click in the HDL Libraries window, select Create Library, and enter a library name into the Library name text field. 3. Click OK. A new library appears in the HDL Libraries window and is now the active library (current HDL target library is designated by a red ball marker). 4. Open the Properties window with a right-click on the HDL Design node and select Properties. 5. The HDL Target Library property is set to the library in the Library list designated by the red ball marker. You can change this propertys value by selecting a new library from the dropdown list in the Value field of the HDL Target Library property. The red ball marker changes to the new library you have specified. DxDesigner will now place compiled source files in this directory. 6. If you want to populate your new library with compiled source files from an existing library, you can map your new library to the _info file of the existing library. a. Right-click the new library and click Map. A file browser appears. b. Navigate to the existing library. c. Select the _info file. d. Click OK.
261
e. To unmap the new library from the existing library, right-click the library and select Unmap. Notes: Do not designate a Central Library as an HDL target library. To view a compiled source file in the HDL library, right-click on a library unit in the right pane of the HDL Libraries window (for example, clock_divider) and select Go to file. You can change the name of the default library by changing the value of the HDL Target Library property in the HDL Design folders list of properties. To view the list of properties, right-click the HDL Design folder and select Properties.
Results
An HDL library is created for source file compilation (transformed source files are also called library units in the HDL library). You are ready to compile the HDL source files.
Related Topics
Compiling HDL Source Files

The HDL source files need to be compiled into the HDL library prior to simulation. The files are displayed in the Project Navigator and different colored file icons are used to indicate compilation status: Not compiled (blue) Compiled successfully (green) Compiled with errors (red) File cannot be found, you must modify the search path (gray) Note You can change the compile order of the files with a right click on the HDL Design tree and opening the Compilation Order dialog box by clicking Compilation Order.
Prerequisites
A library must exist for DxDesigner to place compiled source files. See Creating an HDL Library. The ModelSim executable (vsim.exe) must be specified in the Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation window. However, if you are using the PADS ES Suite, the default
262
ModelSim executable that comes with the build is available without having to set it manually.
Procedure
1. Compile all of the source files with a right-click on the HDL Design node and select Compile. The source files are compiled in the order shown under the HDL Design node (default), property information is displayed in the Properties window, and source file compilation output is shown in the HDL Simulation window. If your source files are order-dependent for compilation, you can change the compilation order as described below, or re-run compilation. Notes: To specify source file compilation order, select the HDL Design node and Compilation Order (deselect the Synchronize Compilation Order with Navigator check box and use the arrow buttons to move the files). Tip: You can drag and drop files (click the file, drag it to the desired location, and release). To pause the source file compilation process, click the Break button in the HDL Simulation toolbar. To view compilation error and warning messages, select the HDL Simulation tab in the Output window. Clicking on a message in the Output window displays the message in your text editor. You can also view the compilation status in the Project Navigator.
Results
The HDL source files are compiled into library units and are located in the library specified by the HDL Target Library property. You are now ready to initialize simulation.
Related Topics
Initializing Simulation
Initializing simulation enables the simulation controls in the HDL Simulation toolbar.
Prerequisites
You must have compiled source files in the library specified by the HDL Target Library property. See Compiling HDL Source Files.
263
You must activate the Simulation pulldown menu item by selecting the HDL Design folder in the Project Navigator. Note You can set the Initializing process to Export HDL Files, Clear design files from the library, and Compile design files as one action by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Setup > Settings > HDL/FPGA Integration > Integrated Simulator > Actions Before Simulation Initialization window.
Procedures
1. Make sure the HDL Simulation toolbar is open. (View > Toolbars > HDL Simulation) 2. In the HDL Simulation toolbars dropdown list, select the top-level design for simulation. 3. Initialize simulation mode with Simulation > Initialize Simulation. DxDesigner is now initialized and in simulation mode. If you have the Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation > Use External ModelSim checkbox selected, the ModelSim interface opens and you can run your simulation from there. If it is unchecked, continue with these procedures. Note You can use Standard Delay Format (SDF) files to perform back annotated simulations. HDL Design > Simulation Settings opens a dialog box for you to enter this information.
Related Topics
Selecting Signals for the Waveform Viewer

You must select the signals whose waveforms you want to view prior to running simulation.
Prerequisites
You must have initialized simulation. See Initializing Simulation.
Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Viewer window with View > Other Windows > Waveform Viewer. 2. Open the Structure window with Waveform > Add Signal.
264
3. Select the signals from the Structure windows Signal list whose waveforms you want to view during or after simulation. 4. Click OK. The signals appear on the left column of the Waveform Viewer. Tip: If you have already run simulation, the signals do not appear in the Structure window. You must select the signals after initializing simulation but before running simulation.
Results
The signals are select for viewing their waveforms. You are now ready to run simulation.
Related Topics
Applying Stimuli to Signals Interactively

You can override testbench stimuli by forcing a signal to the state you want for a period of time you specify.
Prerequisites
You must follow the simulation process through the step where you initialize simulation. See Initializing Simulation.
Procedure
1. Open the Structure window with View > Other Windows > Structure. Your designs signals appear in the Structure window. 2. Right-click the signal to which you want to add stimuli and click Add Stimulator. 3. Open the Stimulators window with View > Other Windows > Stimulators. 4. Select the signal you have added. 5. Select from the Type field either Table or Clock. If you want to enter the stimuli information as a list of values in a table, choose Table. If you want to enter the stimuli information as the function of a clock, choose Clock. 6. Enter the data in the window as needed. The fields of the Stimulator window contain the arguments of ModelSims Force command. See your ModelSim Reference Manual for more information about these arguments.
265
7. Click Apply. The signal gets a check in the Enable field. You can toggle this check box to enable/disable the stimuli for the selected signal.
Results
You are ready to run simulation.
Related Topics
Running Simulation
You have the following three options for running simulation. Those options are listed below under procedures. You can also set up the simulation environment with several debugging tools as described in the topic, Debugging the Simulation Environment.
Prerequisites
You must have selected signals for the waveform viewer. See Selecting Signals for the Waveform Viewer.
Procedures
Simulation > Run: Runs through the entire simulation without stopping. To stop the simulation or to get out of simulation mode, you must click Simulation > End Simulation. Simulation > Step In/Step Out/Step Over: Steps through the source files statementby-statement. It opens the source file and displays the active statement with a yellow highlight. Steps as follows:
o o o
Step In: Steps to the next statement including subprogram calls. Step Out: Steps out of the current subprogram and to the next statement. Step Over: Steps to the next statement, skipping subprograms.
HDL Simulation Toolbar > Run Period: Runs simulation for the period specified in the Run Period list box in the HDL Simulation Toolbar. To change the period, enter a new period and press Enter. You can run for the specified period until the simulation ends, or you can end simulation with Simulation > End Simulation.
266
Results
You are now ready to view waveforms.
Related Topics
Debugging the Simulation Environment

The simulation debugging environment includes the following debug windows you can have open during simulation to help you monitor the simulation: Auto Variables - view objects only available in the current simulation (select View > Other Windows > Auto) Callstack - display names of HDL sub-programs (View > Other Windows > Call Stack) Watch - view object values (for example, signals) in tables (View > Other Windows > Watch)
Note: To view the value of probed nets in the simulation, open the schematic for the current simulation. The net values are displayed next to the pins as the simulation advances.
Related Topics
Running Simulation
Viewing the Waveforms

Prerequisites
The signals must have been added to the waveform viewer after initializing simulation but before running simulation. See Selecting Signals for the Waveform Viewer.
Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Viewer using View > Other Windows > Waveform Viewer (see Figure 9-1).
267
Figure 9-1. Waveform Viewer Window
The top of the window contains a time bar which displays the current, begin, and end times. The left pane shows a list of signals and the right pane contains the waveforms for each signal. 2. Zoom in or out by either scrolling the wheel on your mouse, or with the Waveform > Zoom in/out/fit all items. 3. Add markers with Waveform > Add Marker followed by a click on the waveform viewer window where you want to place the marker. 4. Measure between two events as follows: a. Activate the measure mode with Waveform > Measure. b. Click on the waveform viewer at the first event. c. Drag the mouse to the second event and release the button. A call-out appears with a label that specifies the time lapse between the two events. The mouse cursor will snap to events as it gets close to them. You cannot click or release the button if you are not on/near an event. 5. View edge properties by double-clicking a section of a waveform. The Edge Properties window appears with the time of the leading edge of the waveform.
Related Topics
268
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner HDL Testbenches
HDL Testbenches
HDL Testbenches are top-level design elements, written in VHDL or Verilog, that instantiate the design under test (DUT), apply stimuli, and measure response of the design against expected results.
Below is an annotated example testbench that describes the essential pieces of a VHDL testbench. Its example is the testbench for the first HDL Simulation Example, Simulating a Simple Gate. After you get familiar with the testbench, go run the simple gate example to try it out and see if you can modify it to produce the results you want. For examples of applying testbenches to sample designs, see the Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner.
Parts of a VHDL Testbench

The testbench is composed of the following parts: VHDL Library Inclusion Specifies which libraries to apply to the VHDL file. The standard library for VHDL should begin all VHDL files. You can include other working libraries, but the following is required:
library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.All;
Entity Definition A VHDL file for a component defines its external connections (ports) in the Entity Definition. A testbench is the top-level of the design and thus has no ports. So assign an empty entity as follows:
269
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner HDL Testbenches entity AND_TB is end AND_TB;
Architecture Definition The architecture defines the internal function of the design and has several pieces itself:
o
It begins with the architecture statement.

architecture TB of AND_TB is
It defines the design to use as the DUT in the component statement, defining as well the DUTs ports (notice there is no semi-colon after the last port definition).
component AND_GATE is port( A: in STD_LOGIC; B: in STD_LOGIC; F1: out STD_LOGIC ); end component;
It defines the signals it will use to connect to the ports of the DUT.
signal TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1: std_logic;
It instantiates the DUT, mapping its signals to the DUTs ports.

begin DUT: AND_GATE port map (TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1);
It establishes the sequence and timing of the stimuli to apply to its signals.
process begin TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait;
270
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner HDL Testbenches end process; end TB;
A Complete VHDL Testbench

library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.All; entity AND_TB is end AND_TB; architecture TB of AND_TB is component AND_GATE is port( A: in STD_LOGIC; B: in STD_LOGIC; F1: out STD_LOGIC ); end component; signal TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1: std_logic; begin DUT: AND_GATE port map (TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1); process begin TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait; end process; end TB;
271
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner
Related Topics
Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner

Below are two examples with data that you can use to work your way through the HDL simulation process in DxDesigner. For more examples and to share ideas about running HDL simulation in DxDesigner, visit the HDL Simulation Community page on SupportNet.
Procedures
Simulating a Simple Gate Add an AND gate to a schematic from a VHDL file. Create a testbench and simulate the design. Simulating a Small PCB Design Add a 3-to-8 decoder to a schematic from a VHDL file. Add a six-pin connector for the inputs from a VHDL file that includes the stimuli for simulating the design. Also add an eight-pin connector for the outputs. This design contains basic elements of a complete PCB design.
Related Topics
Simulating a Simple Gate

Place an AND gate and create a testbench with stimuli to simulate this basic design.
Prerequisites
DxDesigner must be open. The path to your directory that contains the ModelSim executable (vsim.exe) must be set in Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation > ModelSim Executable Path. Note: If you are using PADS ES Suite, the path to the ModelSim executable defaults to the ModelSim executable delivered with the PADS ES Suite. If you have a HyperLynx Analog license enabled, you must toggle off Simulation > Analog/Mixed Simulation Mode to have access to the HDL simulation menu items. If
272
you do not have a HyperLynx Analog license enabled, the menu defaults to the HDL simulation menu and you do not need to do anything about this.
Procedure
1. Open the New Project dialog box with File > New > Project. 2. Select Project Templates > netlist > default as the template type. 3. Enter AND_GATE for the name of the new project. 4. Click OK. 5. Create a new schematic with File > New > Schematic. 6. Copy the following VHDL code to a text file called AND_GATE.vhd and place the file in your projects main directory:
library ieee; use ieee.std_logic_1164.all; entity AND_GATE is port( A:in std_logic; B: in std_logic; F1:out std_logic ); end AND_GATE; architecture behv of AND_GATE is begin process(A,B) begin F1 <= A and B; end process; end behv;
7. Copy the following VHDL code to a text file called tb_AND.vhd and place the file in your projects main directory. This file is the testbench.
library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.All; entity AND_TB is end AND_TB; architecture TB of AND_TB is component AND_GATE is port( A: in STD_LOGIC; B: in STD_LOGIC; F1: out STD_LOGIC ); end component; signal TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1: std_logic;
273
begin DUT: AND_GATE port map (TB_A, TB_B, TB_F1); process begin TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '0'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '1'; TB_B <= '1'; wait for 800 ns; TB_A <= '0'; TB_B <= '0'; wait; end process; end TB;
8. Click and drag the AND_GATE.vhd file from your Windows Explorer window to the DxDesigner editing window. Hold it there until the default rectangular symbol appears and unclick the mouse. The AND_GATE.vhd file appears in the Project Navigator under a new HDL Design folder under Schematic 1 Symbols. 9. Right-click the HDL Design folder in the Project Navigator and click Add Files. 10. Navigate to your Projects main directory and select the tb_AND.vhd file. 11. Click Open. The tb_AND.vhd file appears under the HDL Design folder. 12. Select the HDL Design folder. 13. Clear the working library of old compiled files and re-create the library for the new compiled files with Simulation > Clean. 14. Compile the VHDL files with Simulation > Compile Files. Notice the files in the HDL Design folder turn from light blue to green. If compilation had failed, they would have turned red. If compilation fails, check the Output window for error messages. 15. Open the HDL Simulation toolbar with View > Toolbars > HDL/FPGA Integration.
274
16. In the dropdown list in the HDL Simulation toolbar, select and_tb(tb). This specifies the top level for simulation. 17. Initialize simulation with Simulation > Initialize Simulation. 18. Open the Waveform Viewer with View > Other Windows > Waveform Viewer. 19. Open the Structure window with View > Other Windows > Structure. Notice the signals, tb_a, tb_b, and tb_f1 appear in the Signal list. 20. Click and drag each of the three signals to the left column of the Waveform Viewer as shown in the figure below.
21. Run simulation with Simulation > Run. The waveforms appear as below, reflecting the truth table of an AND gate.
22. Stop simulation with Simulation > End Simulation.
Results
You now know how to create a testbench, add a symbol to a schematic from a VHDL file, and simulate that design with the stimuli provided in the testbench. Now you can move on to Simulating a Small PCB Design to expand your understanding of creating stimuli within connector VHDL files instead of a test bench.
Related Topics
275
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner o
Simulating a Small PCB Design
Simulating a Small PCB Design

Place a 3-to-8 decoder along with a six-pin connector for input signals and an eight-pin connector for output signals. The six-pin connector has stimuli written into its VHDL code, so no testbench is required.
Prerequisites
DxDesigner must be open. The path to your directory that contains the ModelSim executable (vsim.exe) must be set in Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation > ModelSim Executable Path. Note: If you are using PADS ES Suite, the path to the ModelSim executable defaults to the ModelSim executable delivered with the PADS ES Suite. If you have a HyperLynx Analog license enabled, you must toggle off Simulation > Analog/Mixed Simulation Mode to have access to the HDL simulation menu items. If you do not have a HyperLynx Analog license enabled, the menu defaults to the HDL simulation menu and you do not need to do anything about this.
Procedure
1. Open the New Project dialog box with File > New > Project. 2. Select Project Templates > netlist > default as the template type. 3. Enter DECODE for the name of the new project. 4. Click OK. 5. Create a new schematic with File > New > Schematic. 6. Copy the following VHDL code to a text file called Conn6.vhd and place the file in your projects main directory. Notice the stimuli are applied to the pins as a bus signal.
library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.All; entity Conn6 is port ( signal signal signal signal signal signal );
C1: C2: C3: C4: C5: C6:
out out out out out out
STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC
end entity Conn6;
276
architecture Decode3To8 of Conn6 is signal IntStimBus: STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(1 to 6); begin IntStimBus <= "000100", "001100" after "010100" after "011100" after "100100" after "101100" after "110100" after "111100" after "110100" after "101100" after "100100" after "011100" after "010100" after "001100" after "000100" after "000100" after "001100" after "010100" after "011100" after "100100" after "101100" after "110100" after "111100" after "110100" after "101100" after "100101" after "011110" after "010000" after "001000" after "000000" after "111000" after process (IntStimBus) is begin C1 <= IntStimBus(1); C2 <= IntStimBus(2); C3 <= IntStimBus(3); C4 <= IntStimBus(4); C5 <= IntStimBus(5); C6 <= IntStimBus(6); end process; end architecture Decode3To8;
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms, 70 ms, 80 ms, 90 ms, 100 ms, 110 ms, 120 ms, 130 ms, 140 ms, 150 ms, 160 ms, 170 ms, 180 ms, 190 ms, 200 ms, 210 ms, 220 ms, 230 ms, 240 ms, 250 ms, 260 ms, 270 ms, 280 ms, 290 ms, 300 ms;
7. Copy the following VHDL code to a text file called Conn8.vhd and place the file in your projects main directory. This connector terminates the outputs.
library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.All; entity Conn8SIP is
277
port ( signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal );
P1: P2: P3: P4: P5: P6: P7: P8:
out out out out out out out out
STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC; STD_LOGIC
end entity Conn8SIP; architecture OutputConn of Conn8SIP is signal IntStimBus: STD_LOGIC_VECTOR(1 to 8); begin IntStimBus <= "ZZZZZZZZ", "ZZZZZZZZ" after 10 ms; process (IntStimBus) is begin P1 <= IntStimBus(1); P2 <= IntStimBus(2); P3 <= IntStimBus(3); P4 <= IntStimBus(4); P5 <= IntStimBus(5); P6 <= IntStimBus(6); P7 <= IntStimBus(7); P8 <= IntStimBus(8); end process; end architecture OutputConn;
8. Copy the following VHDL code to a text file called Decoder.vhd and place the file in your projects main directory.
library IEEE; use IEEE.std_logic_1164.ALL; -- VHDLdescription of a 3 to 8 decoder with 3 enablelines entity Decode74138 is port ( signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal
Y0: out STD_LOGIC; Y1: out STD_LOGIC; Y2: out STD_LOGIC; Y3: out STD_LOGIC; Y4: out STD_LOGIC; Y5: out STD_LOGIC; Y6: out STD_LOGIC; Y7: out STD_LOGIC; A: in STD_LOGIC; B: in STD_LOGIC; C: in STD_LOGIC;
278
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Getting Started with Digital Simulation in DxDesigner signal G1: in STD_LOGIC; signal NotG2A: in STD_LOGIC; signal NotG2B: in STD_LOGIC ); end entity Decode74138; architecture default of Decode74138 is signal SelData : std_logic_vector(2 downto 0); signal Ybus : std_logic_vector(7 downto 0); begin SelData <= C & B & A; process(SelData,G1,NotG2A,NotG2B) begin if(G1='1' and NotG2A='0' and NotG2B='0') then case SelData is when "000" => Ybus <= "11111110"; when "001" => Ybus <= "11111101"; when "010" => Ybus <= "11111011"; when "011" => Ybus <= "11110111"; when "100" => Ybus <= "11101111"; when "101" => Ybus <= "11011111"; when "110" => Ybus <= "10111111"; when "111" => Ybus <= "01111111"; when others => Ybus <= "XXXXXXXX"; end case; else Ybus <= "11111111"; end if; end process; process(Ybus) begin Y0 <= Ybus(0); Y1 <= Ybus(1); Y2 <= Ybus(2); Y3 <= Ybus(3); Y4 <= Ybus(4); Y5 <= Ybus(5); Y6 <= Ybus(6); Y7 <= Ybus(7); end process; end architecture default;
9. Click and drag the Conn6.vhd file from your Windows Explorer window to the DxDesigner editing window. Hold it there until the default rectangular symbol appears and unclick the mouse. Place it on the left side of the window. The Conn6.vhd file appears in the Project Navigator under a new HDL Design folder under Schematic 1 Symbols. 10. Right-click the connector symbol and click Properties. The Properties window appears. 11. Set the Name property to InConn.
279
12. Using the same method, add the Conn8.vhd file to the right side of the DxDesigner editing window. 13. Set the Conn8 symbols Name property to OutConn. 14. Select the OutConn symbol. 15. Move the pins from the right to the left side of the OutConn symbol with Format > Mirror. 16. Add the Decode.vhd file to the middle of the DxDesigner editing window. 17. Set the decoder symbols name to Decode. 18. Select the InConn symbol and move it to the Decode symbol so the pins connect. 19. Unclick the mouse. (You must unclick the mouse for DxDesigner to automatically connect the nets.) 20. Click and drag the InConn symbol away from the Decode symbol and nets appear between the pins.
21. Repeat the process with the OutConn symbol to create nets from the Decode symbol to the OutConn symbol. 22. Select each of the six input nets in turn and set their Name property as described in the table below: Table 9-2. InConn Net Names InConn Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 Net Name SigA SigB SigC EN1
280
Table 9-2. InConn Net Names InConn Pin C5 C6 23. Select all eight of the output nets. 24. Open the Add Properties dialog box with Edit > Add Properties. 25. Enter Out in the Prefix field. 26. Set Value > Dec to 1. 27. Click Apply. The eight outputs nets are now named Out1 through Out8. 28. Click Close. The design in the editor window should appear as follows: Net Name nEN2 nEN3
29. Right-click the HDL Design folder under the Decode symbol in the Project Navigator and click Compile. The light-blue Decode.vhd symbol turns to green. If the symbol turns red, the compilation failed, so check the Output window for error messages. 30. Repeat the compile process for the InConn and OutConn VHDL files. 31. Create a HDL Design directory under Schematic1 in the Project Navigate with a rightclick on the Schematic1 item and a click on Create HDL Design. 32. Netlist the schematic and prepare all the VHDL files for simulation with a right-click on the HDL Design folder under Schematic1 and a click on Export HDL Files. 33. Expand the HDL Design folder under Schematic1. Notice the three VHDL files are there along with two Schematic1*.vhd files. 34. Add these files to DxDesigners working library with Simulation > Clean. 35. Compile all the files with Simulation > Compile Files. All the file icons turn from light blue to green. 36. Open the HDL Simulation toolbar with View > Toolbars > HDL Simulation. 37. In the dropdown list in the HDL Simulation toolbar, select Schematic1.schematic1_cfs. This specifies the top level for simulation.
281
38. Initialize simulation with Simulation > Initialize Simulation. 39. Open the Waveform Viewer with View > Other Windows > Waveform Viewer. 40. Open the Structure window with View > Other Windows > Structure. Notice the signals that appear in the Signal list. 41. Click and drag the following signals into the left pane of the Waveform Viewer: siga, sigb, sigc, and out1-out8. 42. Expand the schematic1 item in the left pane of the Structure window and select inconn. 43. Add the intstimbus signal to the Waveform Viewer list. 44. Run the simulation with Simulation > Run. 45. End the simulation with Simulation > End Simulation. 46. Zoom out inside the Waveform Viewer by scrolling the wheel of your mouse until the waveforms appear as below:
Results
You now know how to create a design with stimuli embedded in the connector VHDL files.
Related Topics
282
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Netlisting from DxDesigner for Digital Simulation in ModelSim o
Simulating a Simple Gate
Netlisting from DxDesigner for Digital Simulation in ModelSim

You can netlist either top-level schematics, or hierarchical blocks. Be aware that all components (including passive and analog components) under the level you are exporting are included in the export and therefore must have models attached to them for the simulation to succeed. Note You can skip the netlisting step and run the ModelSim interface from DxDesigner without netlisting by setting the Setup > Settings > HDL Simulation > Use External ModelSim check box. When you initialize simulation (see Initializing Simulation) in DxDesigner, the ModelSim interface opens and you can simulate from there.
Procedure
1. Configure the project language export settings in DxDesigner by selecting Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Export HDL (subcategory). 2. Set any additional HDL export options in Setup > Settings > Project (category) > Export HDL (subcategory). 3. In the Project Navigator, select the HDL Design node and right-click Export HDL.
Results
The netlist file is exported and source files appear in a default folder located directly below the HDL Design node. To see source file contents in the text editor, double-click the file node in the Project Navigator.
Related Topics
o
Inserting VHDL, SPICE, and Verilog Files onto a Schematic

You can use the Windows drag-and-drop action to insert VHDL (.vhd), SPICE (.cir, .ckt, .mod, .spi), and Verilog files directly from a Windows Explorer directory onto a schematic. When you do this, DxDesigner automatically creates a symbol for the file. If the file contains multiple
283
Simulating Designs in DxDesigner Simulating Signal Integrity with HyperLynx
model descriptions, then a dropdown menu lets you select a component from the file when you drop the file onto the schematic. The name of the generated symbol is the same as the name of the VHDL entity or the SPICE model. DxDesigner adds attributes to the symbol to support netlisting for simulation.
Insert a File over an Existing Symbol

When you and drag and drop a VHDL or SPICE file onto a schematic, you can edit the resulting symbol contains all of its original attributes and it just like any other symbol. If the symbol already exists, the existing symbol attaches to the cursor, and you can place it on the schematic.
Simulating Signal Integrity with HyperLynx

Use the LineSim Link to export to HyperLynx for signal integrity simulation, or to import any new data from HyperLynx. You can use the link to do any of the following: Automate net schematic creation Determine if topology constraints are needed for PCB layout Determine if min/max delay or length constraints are needed Determine if additional termination parts are needed Plan the board stackup Update and retain signal integrity model assignments Easily re-run simulations with any updated stackup and termination properties
Restriction
The results from LineSim simulation are not suitable for direct interpretation for constraint synthesis; you will need to enter any derived constraint data manually into DxDesigner.
Procedures
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link
Related Topics
284
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link

You can export your design to HyperLynx with LineSim Link.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > LineSim Link to open the LineSim Link dialog box. 2. In the DxDesigner schematic, select the nets you want to export. 3. Click Load Data from DxDesigner to populate the fields on the dialog box. 4. To exclude interconnections when exporting, click Parts only schematic. Otherwise click Complete schematic. 5. If you want to change the default layer, typically the first metal layer, select the one you want from the Layer list. 6. If you want to change the default length and width, type the value you want in the box. 7. To add a passive prefix, find the correct type in the Passive Prefixes list and type the prefix in the corresponding box. Tips: Prefixes are separated in each list by a comma, a space, or a semicolon. You can remove a prefix from the list as well; just highlight it and press delete.
8. To add a supply net, scroll to the bottom of the Supply Nets list, click twice, slowly, in the Net box, and type the name of the net. Type the voltage value in the Voltage box. 9. Select or browse for the filename to which you want to export. 10. Verify that the correct nets are being exported, the pins are in the correct order, and the direction of all bidirectional pins are correct on the Schematic Topology tab. 11. Click Export to HyperLynx. The .ffs file is generated and if HyperLynx is installed on your system, it opens with the new file loaded. 12. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Related Topics
o
Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link
LineSim Link Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
285

Procedure
1. Select Tools > LineSim Link to open the LineSim Link dialog box. 2. In the DxDesigner schematic, select the nets you want to import. 3. Click Load Data from DxDesigner to populate the fields on the dialog box. 4. Select or browse for the filename from which you want to import. 5. Click Import from HyperLynx. DxDesigner compares the imported data with the schematic that is currently loading, and opens the Merge Differences dialog box. 6. To view the stackup and trace changes, click Show stackup and trace changes. The dialog box expands. 7. Verify the current topology against the imported topology. Select any changed nets, listed in green, to view the pin properties and values that have changed. Click Accept if the changes are what you expected. Click Deny to reject all of the imported data. 8. If you accepted the import data, you can then change the order or direction of an imported pin, if necessary, on the Schematic Topology tab. 9. Click Close to close the dialog box. Also see the following procedures: Excluding a Net from Export Changing the Order of Pins Changing the Direction of a Pin
Related Topics
o
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link
LineSim Link Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Excluding a Net from Export

You can exclude a net from export when you decide it is unnecessary to exist in the exported file.
Procedure
1. Click the Schematic Topology tab.
286
2. If you want to automatically zoom to a net in the schematic when you select one in the Schematic Topology list, click the Zoom check box. 3. Select the net you want to exclude and click Exclude Net. The net is crossed out in red in the list. Tip: To include an excluded net, select the excluded net from the list and click the Include Net button. This button dynamically changes to reflect whether the net is included or excluded.
Related Topics
o o
Changing the Order of Pins Changing the Direction of a Pin
Changing the Order of Pins

You can change the order of pins only.
Procedure
1. Click the Schematic Topology tab. 2. If you want to automatically zoom to a net in the schematic when you select one in the Schematic Topology list, click the Zoom check box. 3. Select the net that contains the pins you want to change and drill down until you find them. 4. Select the pin you want to move and click the up or down arrow depending on which way you want to move it.
Related Topics
o o
Excluding a Net from Export Changing the Direction of a Pin
Changing the Direction of a Pin

You can change the direction of bidirectional pins only.
Procedure
1. Click the Schematic Topology tab.
287
2. If you want to automatically zoom to a net in the schematic when you select one in the Schematic Topology list, click the Zoom check box. 3. Select the net that contains the bidirectional pin and drill down until you find it. 4. With the bidirectional pin selected, click the Change direction button.
Related Topics
o o
Excluding a Net from Export Changing the Order of Pins
288
Chapter 10 Exchanging Data with Layout Tools

Once you have finished your design, you may want to post-process it for use in other tools. The procedures depend on your projects workflow type. For more information on the workflow types, see DxDesigner Workflows.
Procedures
Packaging A Design Exchanging Data Within Netlist Workflow
Related Topics
Packaging A Design
The packager prepares for forward annotation, mapping each component in the logical schematic to a physical part by assigning reference designators. If the design is hierarchical, the packager flattens it. Although a design is packaged automatically when you forward annotate, you can also package it manually. This is useful when you are not finished with a design, but want to confirm that Reference Designators will be handled correctly when the design is forward annotated. Refraining from forward annotation also saves time.You can increase time savings by restricting the behavior, optimization algorithm, and scope of the packager, using the Packager dialog box.
Procedure
1. Click Tools > Package. The Packager dialog box appears 2. Configure the Packager dialog box settings (or run with default settings).
Results
The results of running the packager are shown in the Packager tab of the Output window. If there are reports generated to the project's ./Log Files folder such as an unused gate report, you can use the File > File Viewer to read them. See File Viewer Utility in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for additional details. The Packager tab may list other reports written to the project's ./Integration folder, which you can read with a plain-text editor or reader.
289
Exchanging Data with Layout Tools Exchanging Data Within Netlist Workflow
Related Topic
Exchanging Data with Layout Tools Packager Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Exchanging Data Within Netlist Workflow

Within a Netlist workflow, the primary method of exchanging data with a layout tool, including Expedition PCB, is to use the PCB Interface (Tools > PCB Interface) as shown in the following figure: Figure 10-1. Netlist Workflow Dataflows
DxDesigner
iCDB
PCB Interface
Layout Tools
DxDesigner
iCDB
Import File
Tool
DxDesigner
iCDB
Export File
Tool
Related Topic
Exchanging Data with Layout Tools RSCM (Remote Server Configuration Manager) Server Administration in the Remote Server Configuration Manager and Server Manager Administrators Guide Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout
290
Chapter 11 Archiving Projects

The Archiver utility collects and stores schematics, symbols, and other data associated with a specific design or project in DxDesigner. You can run the Archiver from a Wizard, where you select such options as what files to archive, and the location and format of the output. For more information, see Archiver Wizard in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. You can also archive your project by Running DxArchiver from a Command Line.
Procedure
1. Open the DxArchiver wizard with the Tools > Archiver pulldown menu item. 2. In the Options screen, select the project you want to archive and the target directory for the output. 3. If you want the output compressed, click the Compress using zip format check box. 4. If you want all the sheets saved in pdf format, click the Create pdf check box. 5. Click Next. 6. Enter any additional files you want to include in the archive. NOTE: Do not add the <project_dir>/database folder to the Additional files list. This folder is included automatically. 7. Click Finish.
Results
The Archiver produces the archive file in the format and location you specified. The settings you used are stored in the <project_dir>/DxArchiver.xml. It also reports results to a log file in the standard directory, and to the Results screen. Note To work on an archived project: 1. Optional: Uncompress the archived file if necessary. 2. Open the archived .prj file in DxDesigner.
Related Topics
291
Archiving Projects Running DxArchiver from a Command Line
Running DxArchiver from a Command Line
Running DxArchiver from a Command Line

This topic describes how to run DxArchiver.exe from a command line.
Prerequisite for Adding Additional Folders/Files to a Project Archive

If you want to archive additional files with your project, you need to create or modify a DxArchiver.xml file for your project. There is currently no command line option to specify additional files or folders to be added to the archive. The DxArchiver.xml file can also be used to set other options so that you do not need to specify them on the command line. See the following DxArchiver.xml file example content:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <DxArchiverProject version="1"> <DxProject Path= "Path="C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj"/>  <TargetDirectory Path="C:\gary_archives"/>  <Compression Type="Zip"/>  <PDF Type="1"/>  <AdditionalFiles> <File Path="C:\gary_archives\Archiver_test"/> </AdditionalFiles> </DxArchiverProject>
If DxArchiver was previously run from DxDesigner, a <project_dir>/DxArchiver.xml has been created. You can edit this file to add or modify the <AdditionalFiles> section or any other section prior to running DxArchiver.exe from a command line. Otherwise, you will need to create a DxArchiver.xml file with the minimum lines shown in bold above. Note Do not add the <project_dir>/database folder to the Additional files list. This folder is included automatically. If you do, an error is generated when trying to open the archived design, such as: unable to open icdb connection.
Procedure
1. To view all the available command line arguments, enter the following on a command line:
%SDD_HOME%\wv\win32\bin\DxArchiver.exe -h
The following is an example of the command line information that is displayed:
292
Usage: DxArchiver [ p file_name] t directory] [ c file_name] [ l log_file] [noGUI] [zip] [h] -p file_name -t directory -c file_name DxDesigner project to archive (file_name = the name of the .prj file) Target directory of archive DxArchiver project (path to DxArchiver.xml file, which is read upon invocation to set previously stored options and gets written with any new options that have changed during execution) DxArchiver log file DxArchiver will not be available in the graphical user interface Archive will be packed using zip Display this help message PDF files will be created
-l log_file -noGUI -zip -h -createpdf
2. Execute the command, specifying at a minimum the -noGUI option and the -p target directory such as in the following:
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxDWIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj
The above example assumes that a DxArchiver.xml file exists in the DxTutorial project folder with contents as shown in Prerequisite for Adding Additional Folders/Files to a Project Archive. All the desired options are stored in the .xml file. If the DxArchiver.xml is located in a folder other than the project folder, the following command line shows how to specify that .xml file location:
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxDWIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj -c C:\gary_archives\DxArchiver.xml
If just the bolded lines existed in the DxArchive.xml file shown in Prerequisite for Adding Additional Folders/Files to a Project Archive, to get the same functionality you would have to enter the following:
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj -c C:\gary_archives\DxArchiver.xml -t C:\gary_archives -zip -createpdf
Related Topic
Archiving Projects
293
294
Chapter 12 Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF

You can print or plot your design to hard copy, or capture your design in a PDF file.
Procedures
Generating a PDF of Your Design Printing in Windows Plotting in Windows
Related Topics
Generating a PDF of Your Design

Use DxPDF to read a DxDesigner schematic, generate a hierarchical representation of the schematic design, and then save the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. During this process, DxPDF preserves the hierarchy of the design and cross references the nets. You can distribute the generated PDF design to other design team members. You can also use DxPDF in conjunction with enterprise wide data management systems to store and distribute schematic design data. For more information on DxPDF setup and options, see DxPDF Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. Note Dynamic links are supported in the PDF file (see Viewing Objects Across Multiple Schematic Sheets).
Procedure
1. Open the DxPDF dialog box with File > Export > PDF. 2. Fill in the General, Advanced, and Fonts tabs. See the DxPDF Dialog topic in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for details. 3. Click Run.
295
Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF Printing in Windows
Results
DxPDF shows information about the status of the PDF file it generates in the Output window. You can use this information to diagnose any problems that occur during the conversion process. If you selected the Start Acrobat Reader check box, DxPDF shows the design in Adobe Acrobat. You can search for any text that is visible on the schematic. If you cleared the Start Acrobat Reader check box, DxPDF generates a PDF file and saves it in the folder where the DxDesigner project is located.
Related Topics
Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF
Printing in Windows
You can print the active window or the current sheet. You can also print an entire design. As a special case, you can send your output to an HPGL file. Because colors that are easy to work with during a DxDesigner session are not always the best colors for printing, DxDesigner allows you to define a viewing color and a printing color for each object. Refer to Display - Objects - Settings Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual for information about defining colors for graphical objects, components, text, and annotation objects.
Prerequisites
To print from Windows, you set the following environment variables: WDIR - (Required) You specify WDIR during your DxDesigner installation HPGL_WIDTH_SCALE and HPGL_HEIGHT_SCALE (Optionalused for HPGL output) If you are sending your output to HPGL, you can use the HPGL_WIDTH_SCALE and variables to scale the fonts in the HPGL plot file. The values you give to the variables are floating point numbers and are used as scaling constants.
o o
A value greater than 1 increases the font size. A value less than 1 reduces the font size.
Procedure
1. Open the Print dialog box with File > Print. 2. Fill in the appropriate fields in the Print dialog box. 3. Specify whether or not you want to print any sheets below the current one in the hierarchy if the current sheet has hierarchy.
296
Printing, Plotting and Generating PDF Plotting in Windows
4. Click OK. For more information about Print dialog box options, click the Help button on the dialog box. Tip: If you want to use default print settings, click the toolbar button.
Related Topics
o
Plotting in Windows
Plotting in Windows
DxDesigner provides the following options for your plotting needs.
Procedures
Configuring a Basic Plot Exporting the Design to Metafile Format Spooling the Plot
Related Topics
o
Printing in Windows
Configuring a Basic Plot

You can create a basic plot using the plotters default parameters, or customize your plot by configuring additional parameters.
Procedures
1. From the command prompt, type plotsetup. This opens the plotting worksheet. 2. In the Devices box, select the device that matches your plotter. 3. To selecting the paper size, click either a US or Metric Paper size. The contents of the X> and Y> boxes will reflect the size you have chosen. Tip: You use the Plot Options worksheet to specify ZSIZE parameters or to define additional custom paper sizes.
297
4. To plot a full or zoomed view of the sheet, in the Extents section, select an option as follows:
o
To plot the entire sheet, regardless of whether you are zoomed in when you initiate plotting, click Full Sheet. To plot section of the sheet you are zoomed in to when you initiate plotting, click Zoomed View.
5. Click OK to close the plotting worksheet and save the parameters you have set.
Related Topics
Plotting in Windows
o o
Exporting the Design to Metafile Format Spooling the Plot
Exporting the Design to Metafile Format

You export the design to a metafile format before you spool it to a plotter.
Procedure
1. Open the design you want to plot. 2. Choose File > Export > Powerview Metafile from the main menu. 3. In the Save As dialog box, enter the path and name you want to save to. The default extension for the exported metafile is.met.
Related Topics
Plotting in Windows
o o
Configuring a Basic Plot Spooling the Plot
Spooling the Plot

You can spool your design for plotting with the command line splplt command.
Procedure
In a Windows command shell, type the following at the command:
splplt -m <spoolable dev. name> -d <project dir> -f <file name>
298
The file is plotted on the device specified with the -m argument.
Related Topics
Plotting in Windows
o o
Configuring a Basic Plot Exporting the Design to Metafile Format
299
300
Chapter 13 Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout

The DxDesigner/PADS Layout flow provides seamless integration between the tools, letting you do the following tasks from within DxDesigner: Creating a PADS Layout Design from a DxDesigner Schematic Forward Annotating from DxDesigner to a PADS Layout Design Back-Annotating from a PADS Layout Design to DxDesigner Cross probing is enabled/controlled by PADS Layout. See Cross-Probing with DxDesigner. Displaying PADS Decal Pin Numbers Viewing and Assigning PADS Decals from DxDesigner Verifying Component Pin Numbers Against PADS Decals
Displaying PADS Decal Pin Numbers

The PADS Decal Previewer displays up to four decal pin numbers for a decal. You can also display any amount of decal pin numbers in a dialog box. Use this information to confirm that pin numbers have been assigned to the decal, or whether assigned pin numbers are alphanumeric. Requirement: You must open a schematic in DxDesigner that has a corresponding PADS Layout design.
Procedure
1. From the View Menu, click Other Windows > PADS Decal Preview. 2. In the Schematic Window, select a component that has an associated decal. The decal displays, along with its first four pin numbers. 3. Right-click in an empty area of the Decal Previewer, and select View PADS Decal Pin Numbers. A list of pin numbers appears in the PADS Decal Pin Numbers dialog box.
301
Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout Viewing and Assigning PADS Decals from DxDesigner
Viewing and Assigning PADS Decals from DxDesigner

Use the DxDesigner Decal Previewer to display Decals stored in PADS libraries, and to add and delete decals associated with schematic symbols.
Viewing PADS Decals from DxDesigner

You can browse PADS decal libraries and view PADS decals from DxDesigner, without opening PADS Layout. Requirement: The DxDesigner Window must display a schematic that corresponds to a PADS Layout design.
Procedure
1. In the Schematic Window, select a component. 2. From the View Menu, click Other Windows > PADS Decal Preview. 3. In an empty area of the Decal Previewer, Right-Click, then select Browse PADS Decals. 4. In the PADS Decal Browser dialog box, select a library. 5. Optionally, filter your results as follows: a. Select filter critera. By Name Tip: You can use the Wildcard (*) for any number of characters. By Pin Count Tip: Do not use a wildcard (*) in this field. Leave the field blank to search for all pin counts. b. Click Apply Filter. The PADS Decal Browser displays a filtered list of decals. These decals are categorized as assigned or unassigned. You can click any decal name to see its footprint and pin number list. Note When you click Apply Filter, DxDesigner ANDS the values of the By Name and By Pin Count fields to produce the filtered results.
302
Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout Viewing and Assigning PADS Decals from DxDesigner
Assigning PADS Decals to DxDesigner Symbols

DxDesigner uses the value of the PKG_TYPE and ALT_PKG_LST symbol attributes to assign PADS Decals to DxDesigner symbols. Use the PADS Decal Browser to edit these assignments by changing the value of one of these attributes. Use the PKG_TYPE attribute to assign a single decal to a symbol Use the ALT_PKG_LST attribute to assign a list of alternate decals to a symbol
Requirement: The PKG_TYPE or ALT_PKG_LST attribute must be assigned at the symbol level.
Prerequisite
To prepare to edit a symbol decal: 1. In the Schematic Window, select a component, right-click > Edit Library Symbol or right-click > Edit Local Symbol. 2. In the Symbol Editor, select Tools > PADS Decal Browser.
Procedure
1. In the Unassigned Decals list, select the decal you want to use, then click Assign. The decal moves to the Assigned Decals list, and appears in the Decal Preview window.
o
If you have selected the PKG_TYPE attribute, you can only assign one decal to the symbol.
2. If you have selected the ALT_PKG_LST attribute, you can assign up to 16 decals to the symbol. Tip: The first decal on the list is the default for the symbol. Use the Up and Down buttons to change the list order. 3. To delete a decal select a decal from the Assigned Decals list, then click Unassign. The decal moves to the Unassigned Decals list. Related Topics Forward Annotating from DxDesigner to a PADS Layout Design Back-Annotating from a PADS Layout Design to DxDesigner Verifying Component Pin Numbers Against PADS Decals
303
Interfacing Between DxDesigner and PADS Layout Verifying Component Pin Numbers Against PADS Decals
Verifying Component Pin Numbers Against PADS Decals

To confirm that you have assigned component pin numbers correctly, you can verify them against the corresponding PADS Layout decal pin numbers, using the checkdxdesignerdecals.exe utility. This utility processes all components in a design, proceeding through the design hierarchy from the top schematic you define. Requirements: You have set the PADS Design Configuration for the active project. Note: If you do not set a PADS design configuration, you can still use this utility by starting it from the Programs directory. However, it will not appear in your Tools menu. The current active window must be the schematic, not a symbol. The Design must be packaged.
o
In a packaged design, the ? character will not appear. Therefore, to verify that the design is packaged, do one of the following: Visually scan the Project Navigator Contents, REFDES column, to search for the ? character. Open the netlist (<project_directory>\projectname.asc) file using MicroSoft Word, and search for the ? character.
DxDesigner Link packages a design as the first step in passing data to PADS Layout. For more information, see Forward Annotating from DxDesigner to a PADS Layout Design. Either the PKG_TYPE or ALT_PKG_LST attribute has been assigned to the underlying symbol for the components you want to check. Note: Although one of the above attributes is required, its placement at the symbol level is highly recommended.
o
To verify the symbol attributes: i. Double-click a component. The Component Properties dialog box opens. ii. On the Attributes tab, scroll down to find the PKG_TYPE attribute, then select it. If the PKG_TYPE attribute does not appear, you must place it on the symbol.
Procedure
1. From the Tools menu, click Check PADS Decal Pin Numbers. The Check Design against PADS Decal Pin Number dialog box opens
304
2. Verify that the Design field is correct. If it is not, close the box and correct it in one of the following ways: If you have enabled the PADS Layout Design Configuration, correct the value in the Top Schematic property. If you have not enabled the PADS Layout Design Configuration, the Design field corresponds to the active schematic. Close the open schematic and open the top level schematic for the project.
3. Set the level to which you want to verify, if it is different than the default of STD. 4. Click Check Design. The utility checks all component pin numbers in the design against their corresponding PADS decal pin numbers, and reports the results in the dialog box. 5. Correct any errors, and then recheck. Note: The dialog box can remain open while you correct errors.
305
306
Chapter 14 Generating Bills of Materials

To generate a bill of materials from DxDesigner, you use the Part Lister (Tools > Part Lister). In addition to generating a bill of materials report, the Part Lister can generate the following: Part lists Cost estimate summaries Printed circuit board area requirements MRP (Manufacturing Resource Planning) reports
The Part Lister reads schematic databases to extract component property information for generating data files of user-defined format and content. The property data you extract can be any user- or Mentor Graphics-defined symbol (unattached) property.
Procedures
Setting Up the Part Lister Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner Output File Format Part Lister Dialog in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Setting Up the Part Lister

You can use the Part Lister dialog to configure your output report, or from the Part Lister dialog you can specify a pre-saved settings file (.ipl file) that stores your output report configuration. The Part Lister then uses the .ipl file to configure the output report. For specific information on the .ipl file, refer to Part Lister Initialization File topic in the DxDesigner Reference Manual. Default settings for the Part Lister are stored in a file called \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\templates\PartListerExpedition.ipl (Expedition workflow type) or
307
Generating Bills of Materials Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\templates\PartListerNetlist.ipl (Netlist workflow type). You can save customized settings with the Part Lister dialog > File > Save As command. Note To avoid accidentally overwriting your default .ipl file, you should always save your customized settings with the Part Lister dialog > File > Save As command, before you click Run.
Related Topic
Generating Bills of Materials
o o
Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line
Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window

Invoke Part Lister from the DxDesigner Window to invoke it from the GUI. The output appears in the Output window.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Part Lister from the menu bar. The Part Lister dialog opens in a separate window. 2. Set the Part Lister options on the following three tabs or use your saved settings by using the Part Lister dialog > File > Open command and navigating to the desired .ipl file. Settings - you set the path to the project and block, and choose the type of output you want. Page - you select the page size, margins, headers, and spacing. Columns - you set up the spreadsheet columns for your output, and define the items and labels for the columns.
For specific information on the Part Lister GUI, refer to Part Lister Dialog topic in the DxDesigner Reference Manual
Related Topic
o o
Setting Up the Part Lister Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line
308
Generating Bills of Materials Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line
Invoking Part Lister from the Command Line

Invoke Part Lister from the command line when you want to run it without opening DxDesigner.
Procedure
You invoke Part Lister from the command line by typing:
icdbpartslister.exe [-o path][-i path]...[-b name][-d path][--] [--version][-h]
Where: -o path, --output path The output file path -i path, --config path The configuration file path. You can enter multiple configuration file paths. -b name, --block name The block name. -d path, --projectpath path The path to the project file. --, --ignore_rest Ignore any labeled arguments following this flag. --version Display version information and exit. -h, -help Display usage information and exit.
Related Topic
o o
Setting Up the Part Lister Invoking Part Lister from DxDesigner Window
309
Generating Bills of Materials Output File Format
Output File Format

The output files appearance depends on two things: the design, and the initialization file. The design is the data source, and the initialization file dictates what data will appear and how it will appear in the output file. As an example, below is an output file generated for a simple mixed signal design:
test Wednesday, September 29, 1993 11:41 am Page 1 TEST_CIRCUIT REVISION_HISTORY: REV0 REV1 # QTY REF DESC TOLR WATT VALUE -------------------------------------------------1 1 C1 100UF 2 1 R1 2% .1W 10K 3 3 U1,U3,U4 14PDIP 4 1 U2 16PDIP ----6.0
In this example, the initialization file specified the column labels, retrieved the values of the properties associated with the labels, and put these values in columns defined in the initialization file. For specific information on the output file, refer to Part Lister - Settings Tab topic in the DxDesigner Reference Manual.
Related Topic
310
Appendix 15 Dashboard
The Dashboard is one method to manage different aspects of your design process, such as creating a project, invoking DxDesigner or other various supporting design creation tools. Many of these features are incorporated into DxDesigner, so the Dashboard can be considered an alternative way to perform some of these tasks. You can customize the Dashboard to fit your specific design process flow needs. Do this by setting default preferences, creating and manipulating toolboxes, adding shortcut groups to the Shortcut Bar, and using automation and scripting.
Procedures
Starting the Dashboard Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar
Related Topics
Introduction to DxDesigner Troubleshooting Your Environment
Starting the Dashboard

Start the Dashboard using one of the methods described below:
Procedure
From Windows, execute the menu command Start > All Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Dashboard. (Alternative) Start the Dashboard by double-clicking the Dashboard icon desktop. on the
Related Topics
Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox
311
Dashboard Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style
Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar
Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style

To configure the Dashboard default formats and operations, define a set of user preferences.
Procedure
1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. From the Preferences dialog box, set the following default behaviors: Whether the Dashboard will open Internet Explorer in the Application Launch Pad or open your system's default browser in a full-screen window when you click a Web-enabled item in the Dashboard Tree. Whether a user-specified Web page or expanded information from the Dashboard Tree will appear in the Application Launch Pad when you open the Dashboard. What color various message types displayed in the Output Bar will be.
Related Topics
Starting the Dashboard Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar
Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox

In addition to using the default toolboxes shipped with DxDesigner, you can create and define the contents of new toolboxes, as well as adding items to existing toolboxes. Along with the tools shipped in a toolbox, you can also require additional items as part of your design process, such as a functional specification document for your design and a specific text editor. To customize the Dashboard so that it includes easy access to these items, you can add links within an existing toolbox. For example, your job may be to prepare schematics for export to Layout, so you work primarily in the Board-Level PCB Toolbox. You can add the items to this toolbox for easy access. You can also create a new toolbox with links to these items. If desired, you can then drag and drop an entire toolbox or a specific item into the Shortcut Bar for even faster access. Each toolbox has a directory associated with it. DxDesigner places all default toolbox directories in the standard directory, which is located one level below your DxDesigner
312
Dashboard Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox
installation directory. When you create a new toolbox, you specify where you want to place the associated directory. This directory can include items of the following types: Executables Shortcuts to executables Batch files Script files (such as VBScript) Icons associated with any of these items
Procedures
Creating a Dashboard Toolbox Adding Items to a Toolbox or Modifying the Properties for an Existing Tool Deleting Items From a Dashboard Toolbox
Related Topics
Starting the Dashboard Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar
Creating a Dashboard Toolbox

Create a toolbox in Dashboard to group items and access them quickly.
Procedure
Select File > New > Toolbox, and then enter the name and path of the toolbox in the toolbox properties dialog box. From the Dashboard Tree, (right-click) > Toolboxes > New Toolbox, and then enter the name and path of the toolbox in the toolbox properties dialog box.
Related Topics
o o
Adding Items to a Toolbox or Modifying the Properties for an Existing Tool Deleting Items From a Dashboard Toolbox
313
Dashboard Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox
Adding Items to a Toolbox or Modifying the Properties for an Existing Tool

Add similar applications to a toolbox to organize them and give you quick access to them.
Procedure
1. From the Dashboard Tree or Application Launch Pad, right-click the desired toolbox, then click New Tool. Alternative: To modify properties for an existing tool, right-click the tool icon, and then click Properties. 2. From the Properties dialog box, type a name for the tool. 3. Type the path or browse to the executable file for the tool and enter any command line arguments you want to use with the tool. Tip: A command line argument identifies a specific document associated with an application. For example, if the item you are adding is a link to a specific.doc file, you still must associate the application to the item. In this case, the path to the tool would be the path to the Microsoft Word or Wordpad application executable to which you want the file to be associated. The command line argument is the path to the specific file you want opened when the user clicks on the item. 4. If you do not want a generic icon to represent the tool in the toolbox, type the path or browse to the icon you want to use. Tip: The graphic used to represent the tool in the Dashboard can come from an icon (.ico) file, or an executable or dll with an embedded graphic (such as viewdraw.exe). 5. Specify whether or not you want the tool to be visible in the Output Bar while it is running. 6. If your tool does not require user input, specify that you want to see messages and errors from the tool in the Output Bar. Tip: If the tool will require user input, do not select this option. Instead, the tool will open in a separate window, where you will be asked to enter the input it requires. You will see messages and errors in this window, rather than in the Output Bar.
Related Topics
o o
Creating a Dashboard Toolbox Deleting Items From a Dashboard Toolbox
314
Dashboard Configuring the Dashboard Shortcut Bar
Deleting Items From a Dashboard Toolbox

Remove items from a toolbox to reduce clutter.
Procedure
1. From the Application Launch Pad, open the toolbox. 2. Right-click the item you want to delete, and then click Delete from the shortcut menu that appears.
Related Topics
o o
Creating a Dashboard Toolbox Adding Items to a Toolbox or Modifying the Properties for an Existing Tool

Similar to grouping with Toolboxes, use the Shortcut Bar to organize commonly used or similar applications and documents within shortcut groups and to access them with a single mouse click. Entries you may find useful to include within a shortcut group include the following: DxDesigner tools or other applications Projects listed in the Dashboard Tree (Clicking a Project icon in the Shortcut Bar will automatically expand that particular branch of the Dashboard Tree containing the list of libraries associated with that project) Commonly used schematics (DxDesigner will launch automatically and the schematic will open) Utilities Text Editors
Procedures
Adding a New Shortcut Group to the Shortcut Bar Renaming or Removing a Shortcut Group from the Shortcut Bar
Related Topics
Starting the Dashboard
315
Setting Dashboard Preferences to Fit Your Style Accessing Frequently-Used Documents from Dashboard with a Toolbox
Adding a New Shortcut Group to the Shortcut Bar

Add a group to the Shortcut bar for quick access.
Procedure
1. Select File > New > Shortcut Group. Alternative: Within the open space of the Shortcut Bar, (right-click) > New Shortcut Group. 2. Type a name for the group, and click OK. Result: A title bar for the new shortcut group appears in the Shortcut Bar with the name you specified. The group is now active and any items you add will be included within this shortcut grouping. 3. Do one of the following: Drag and drop items from the Dashboard Folders Bar or Application Launch Pad into the Shortcut Bar to create links to them Right-click within the open space of the Shortcut Bar, click Add Shortcut, and navigate to and select the desired item.
Tip: If you create multiple shortcut groups, you can quickly switch between them by clicking on the title bar of the group you want to show.
Related Topics
o
Renaming or Removing a Shortcut Group from the Shortcut Bar
Renaming or Removing a Shortcut Group from the Shortcut Bar

Rename or remove groups from the Shortcut bar for clarity.
Procedure
Right-click within the open space of the Shortcut Bar, and then click Rename Group or Remove Group.
316
Related Topics
o
Adding a New Shortcut Group to the Shortcut Bar
317
318
Appendix A Troubleshooting Your Environment

The DxDesigner Diagnostics tool in the Dashboard lets you troubleshoot your working environment by displaying information on the following: Your Host ID (PC only) The value of LM_LICENSE_FILE, your licensing environment variable Server information (networked-client license only) Locate DxDesigner-specific files
Procedures
Starting Dashboards DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool Troubleshooting DxDesigner Environment Variables Troubleshooting Your License Finding Files in your PATH or WDIR
Related Topics
Starting Dashboards DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool

The Dashboard is installed along with DxDesigner.
Procedure
1. Start the Dashboard by double-clicking the Dashboard icon on the desktop . 2. In the Dashboard Folders Pane, double-click Toolboxes, and then click Service and Documentation Center. 3. In the Application Launch Pad, double-click Diagnostics.
Related Topic
Troubleshooting Your Environment
319
Troubleshooting Your Environment Troubleshooting DxDesigner Environment Variables
Troubleshooting DxDesigner Environment Variables

DxDesigner uses environment variables to define specific file and directory locations. DxDesigner sets the values for these environment variables during installation. You use DxDesigner Diagnostics to confirm that these environment variables are set correctly.
Prerequisite
Start the DxDesigner Diagnostics tool as described in Starting Dashboards DxDesigner Diagnostics Tool.
Procedure
In the DxDesigner Diagnostics dialog box, select the Environment Tab. The tab displays the following information, that you can use to confirm that your environment variables are set correctly. Table A-1. Environment Variable Diagnostics Environment Variable PATH - a list of directories through which the operating system searches to find executables. WDIR - a writable directory used to store system and user files. WDIR is the first directory DxDesigner searches when looking for information such as an .ini file. LM_LICENSE_FILE - points directly to a license file, or to a license server using the <port>@<host> terminology. Getting information Shows all of the directories specified in your PATH environment variable. Click an item to see the contents of that directory in the right-hand box. Verify that PATH points to the location of the DxDesigner executables) you want to run. Shows all of the directories specified in your WDIR environment variable. Click an item to see the contents of that directory in the right-hand box. Verify that the WDIR variable points to a local writable directory: Show the entries specified in the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable. Click an entry to see the PortID (tcp/ip port) and hostname in the right-hand box. Verify that the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable on each client points to a valid the license file using either the port@hostname of the license server or the explicit path to the license file. For example: LM_LICENSE_FILE=7654@<NT_server_name> LM_LICENSE_FILE=<dir_path>/<license_path> The contents of this box change depending on your individual environment. Click a variable to see its value in the right-hand box. Refer to specific component documentation for correct environment variable values.
OTHER - This box lists any environment variables other than PATH, WDIR and LM_LICENSE_FILE.
320
Troubleshooting Your Environment Troubleshooting Your License
Related Topic
Troubleshooting Your License

You can get troubleshooting information about your license from the Licensing tab of the Diagnostics dialog box. Also see License Utilities Available From Command Line.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Use the following information as a guide to using the tab. Table A-2. Diagnostics Dialog Box - Licensing Tab Items Dialog Box Item Host ID box Troubleshooting tips Reads the HostID from the key or ethernet card of a nodelocked system PC only If the box says not available, it could mean You may be using network licensing You may not have installed the Sentinel Driver, or you may have installed it incorrectly. For information on installing the Sentinel Driver, refer to the FlexLM End Users Guide, located in the common\doc directory of your install tree. You have a bad parallel port You have a bad ethernet card You have a bad key Lists all license-related environment variables and the values of the variables that are used. Select a used variable. Its values appear in the box below the Variable/Value box. Click on a value to display more information
Variable/Value box
321
Troubleshooting Your Environment Troubleshooting Your License
Table A-2. Diagnostics Dialog Box - Licensing Tab Items (cont.) Dialog Box Item Troubleshooting tips Licensing Diagnostic Tools Provides additional information about your license. See if license server is running -- Checks if server and Daemon are running. Enable by selecting an entry in the Variable/Value box Works for network licenses only See who has licenses in use -- Lists, by tool, the name of each user who has a currently checked-out license Enable by selecting an entry in the Variable/Value box Works for network licenses only Get list of all licenses -- Lists the total number of licenses available for each licensed tool. Enable by selecting an entry in the Variable/Value box Works for network licenses only Get HostID from Ethernet card -- reads the HostID from the address of the ethernet card Ethernet card may be local, or attached to the workstation you are logged into Clear Summary Click to clear old information from the results box. If you do not clear the results box, new output appends to existing information.
Related Topic
License Utilities Available From Command Line

You can run licensing utilities from the command line. The following table gives equivalents to utilities available in the Licensing tab of the Diagnostics dialog box. Table A-3. License Utilities from PC Command Line Utility LM_LICENSE_FILE See who has licenses in use Get list of all licenses Get hostid from Ethernet card PC Command set LM_LICENSE_FILE lmutil lmstat -A lmutil lmstat -a lmutil lmhostid
See if license server is running lmutil lmstat
322
Troubleshooting Your Environment Finding Files in your PATH or WDIR
Related Topic
Troubleshooting Your License
Finding Files in your PATH or WDIR

When troubleshooting your working environment, you may need to confirm the presence of appropriate .ini files or PCB configuration files. You use the Find File tab of the Diagnostics dialog box to search for files in the locations defined by either your PATH or WDIR environment variables. If you do not find the files, you may need to edit these environment variables.
Prerequisite
Procedure
1. In the Filename box, enter the name of the file you want to find 2. Click either Search through all directories in PATH or Search through all directories in WDIR, and then click Find. Tip: Your results will append to the information in the output window. To clear the output window, click Clear Summary
Related Topic
323
Troubleshooting Your Environment Finding Files in your PATH or WDIR
324
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Index
A
Adding arc to schematic, 132 box to schematic, 133 circle to schematic, 133 graphics to schematic, 132 line to schematic, 134 text to schematic, 138 Adding nets to pins with Advanced Connect, 201 Aliasing nets, 117 Aligning objects, 172 Arc adding to schematic, 132 Archiving projects, introduction, 291 See also Project Archive Arguments DxDesigner, 23 using with Tools menu, 23 Auto Backup, 58 ripping in ICT, 202 selecting, 164 Bus contents, 50 busconts.ini, 44 Buses introduction, 99
C
Changing, See Customizing Circle adding to schematic, 133 Columns hiding, 208 Command line commands arc, 132 box, 133 circle, 133 executing, 25 line, 134 pop, 144 psch, 144 psh, 144 psheet, 144 scale, 180 schematic, 142 size, 181 slabel, 167 sname, 168 stext, 168 stretch, 181 string, 185 svalue, 168 text, 138 zselect, 158 Commands Advanced Connect, 201 Flip, 122, 179 Mirror, 121, 179 Resize Box, 121 Rip Nets, 112
B
Backup, 58 blocks, 30 Border, 77 applying/removing/changing, 81 changing on schematic, 83 configuration, definition of, 78 creating, 78 creating configuration, 80 deleting from schematic, 83 inserting on schematic, 82 specifying configuration file location, 78 borders.ini, 44 Box adding to schematic, 133 Bus adding, 111 connecting components with, 110
325
Component connecting with buses, 110 handling mechanical parts, 240 handling test points, 241 selecting, 165 selecting multiple with same name, 166 specifying the characteristics of, introduction, 233 Configuring, See Customizing Connection automatically creating by net label names, 131 creating intersecting, 129 Connectivity routing modes, 100 Creating buses, introduction, 99 connections by net label names, 131 intersecting connections, 129 nets, introduction, 99 new project, introduction, 52 new schematic, 141 Cross-probing, internal, 35 Customizing border on schematic, 83 Dashboard, 311 specialized pin symbols, 45 Tools menu, 20 Display - Objects - Settings Dialog, 296 Docked window converting to floating window, 16 description, 15 DRC See also Design Rule Checker DxDesigner troubleshooting environment variables, 320 window types, 15 DxDesigner Diagnostics tool using, 247 DxPDF generating PDF file using, 295 introduction, 295
E
Embedding existing object, 146 new object, 145 See also Object Environment troubleshooting, 319 Explicit power supply definition, 41 Exporting a design to metafile format, 298
F
Files finding in PATH or WDIR, 323 Filtering object selection, 171 Find/Replace dialog box, 184 Flat design contrasted with hierarchical design, 213 traversing sheets, 144 Flip, 122, 179 Flipping object. See also Reflecting object Floating window converting to docked window, 16 description, 15 Fonts scaling, 296 FUB placing on top-level schematic, 219
D
Dashboard customizing, 311 Data exchanging with other tools, 289 Design Rule Checker configuring for current project, 255 configuring, introduction, 253 introduction locating default files, 253 Dialog box Find/Replace, 184 Net Short, 127 Quick Connection View, 37 Differential pairs creating, 124 creating in ICT, 201
326
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z G
Graphics adding to schematic, 132 avoidance routing, 101 orthogonal routing, 100 routing, 100 straight routing, 100 Mouse movements, strokes, 14
H
Hierarchical design contrasted with flat design, 213 creating using bottom-up method, 216 introduction, 213 selecting a design methodology, 214 traversing sheets, 144 hierarchy, project, 30
N
Navigator using, 30 Net Short dialog box, 127 Nets add to active schematic, 103 aliasing, 117 automatically creating connections by label names, 131 automatically placing a link on a net, 93 deleting, 107 introduction, 99 merging, 127 over-ride the default line width, 102 renaming, 107 ripping, 112 selecting, 164 spacing - mouse wheel, 119, 120 viewing associated component, 149
I
Implicit power supply definition, 41 Interconnectivity table splitting horizontally, 209 splitting vertically, 209 Internal cross-probing, 35
K
Key bindings definition of, 14
L
Label selecting from command line, 167 selecting it and associated object from command line, 168 leaf cells, 30 Licensing utilities running from command line, 322 Line adding to schematic, 134 Link placing on a net automatically, 93 placing on a net manually, 92 Linking objects, 147
O
Object aligning more than one, 172 converting embedded object to different file format, 147 copying, 181 embedding, 145 filtering selection choices, 171 linking, 147 linking and embedding, introduction, 145 manipulating from Navigator, 31 pasting from clipboard, 183 reflecting, 176 rotating, 180 scaling, 180 stretching, 181 Output File (.lst) Format, 310
M
Mechanical parts, 240 Merging nets, 127 Metafile exporting design to metafile format, 298 Mirror, 121, 179 Mode
327
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z P
Paper size, 297 Part Lister general information, 307 output file (.lst) format, 310 Part List Exclude property, 241 starting from the command line, 309 Paste objects from clipboard, 183 PDF file generating using the DxPDF interface, 295 Pin configuring specialized, 45 viewing associated component, 149 Plotting configuring a basic plot, 297 in Windows, 297 introduction, 295 selecting paper size, 297 spooling the plot with splplt, 298 Power supply definition explicit, 41 implicit, 41 Printing from Windows, 296 introduction, 295 Project creating new, introduction, 52 opening existing, 55 project hierarchy, 30 Properties adding, 235 changing values, 236 controlling visibility, 236 deleting, 237 parameterized, 83 window, toggling on and off, 233 Ripper customizing graphic, 48 updating to new graphic, 49 Ripping bus in ICT, 202 nets in schematic editor, 112 Rollback, 58 Rotating objects, 180 Routing modes avoidance, 101 orthogonal, 100 straight, 100 Rows hiding, 208
S
Scaling objects, 180 Schematic adding graphics, 132 adding text, 138 border, 77 changing border, 83 creating connections by net label names, 131 creating intersecting connections, 129 creating new, 141 deleting border, 83 filtering which objects to select, 171 generating PDF file, 295 inserting border on, 82 inserting VHDL and SPICE files on, 283 printing and plotting introduction, 295 stroke definitions, 14 Schematic Editor introduction, 141 See also Schematic Sheets copying, 142 reordering, 68 Shortcut Bar adding new shortcut group, 316 configuring, 315 rename or remove shortcut group, 316 Sizing text, attributes or labels, 181 Spacing of nets, 119, 120
R
Reflecting object, 176 Reordering sheets, 68 Resize Box, 121 Reuse introduction, 213 See also Hierarchical design Rip Nets command, 112
328
speccomp.ini, 44 splplt, spool plot command, 298 Stretching objects, 181 String changing name of, 184 Strokes, definition of, 14 Strokes, mouse movement customizing using vdbindings.vbs, 152 disabling, 152 enabling, 151 Symbol configuring specialized pins, 45 docked and floating, 15 Windows docked, 16 floating, 16 grouping into one region, 17 printing from, 296
T
Templates to define project settings, 44 use when creating new project, 52 Test points, 241 Text adding to schematic, 138 changing size of, 181 changing value of, 184 selecting from command line, 168 Text-owner indicator line, 164 Toolbox add item to, 314 creating, 313 delete items from, 315 modify properties of existing tool, 314 Tools menu adding a command to, 21 customizing, 20 editing a command entry, 22 removing a command from, 22 using arguments, 23 Troubleshooting DxDesigner environment variables, 320 working environment, 319 your license, 321
V
Viewing pin and net and associated component, 149
W
Window types
329
330
Third-Party Information
This section provides information on open source and third-party software that may be included in the DxDesigner product. This software application may include libxslt version 1.1.9 third-party software. libxslt version 1.1.9 is distributed under the terms of the W3C Software Notice &License and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/w3c_2002.pdf. libxslt version 1.1.9 may be subject to the following copyrights: Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved Norman Walsh. All Rights Reserved. Thomas Broyer, Charlie Bozeman and Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Bjorn Reese and Daniel Stenberg. All Rights Reserved. Panagiotis Louridas. All Rights Reserved. This software application may include libxml version 2-2.6.22 third-party software, which is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. libxml version 2-2.6.22 may be subject to the following copyrights: John Fleck. All rights reserved. O'Reilly & Associates, Inc. All rights reserved. Gary Pennington and Daniel Veillard. All rights reserved. Bjorn Reese and Daniel Veillard. All rights reserved. Daniel Veillard. All rights reserved. Bjorn Reese and Daniel Stenberg. All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. This software application may include zlib version 1.2.3 third-party software. Zlib version 1.2.3 is distributed under the terms of the zlib license and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: docs/legal/zlib_libpng.pdf. Zlib version 1.2.3 may be subject to the following copyrights: 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
2. 3.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
1997 Christian Michelsen Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Christian Michelsen Research AS makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. This software application may include ActivePerl version 5.8.8.822 ("ActivePerl") third-party software. ActivePerl is subject to the terms of the ActivePerl Community License, version 2.1 and is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the license for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the license. You can view a copy of the license at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/activeperl_community_ 2.1.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to either (1) the GNU General Public License v 2.1 or later, (2) the Perl Artistic License, 1997, or (3) the Perl Artistic License 2.0, at our election. In all instances, we elect the Perl Artistic License option, either the 1997 version, or the 2.0 version, as allowed by the individual copyright holders. Portions of this software may be subject to the Perl Artistic License, 1997. You can view a copy of this License at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/ perl_artistic_1997.pdf. Portions of this software may be subject to the Perl Artistic License 2.0. You can view a copy of this License at: <your_Mentor_Graphics_documentation_directory>/legal/ perl_artistic_2.0.pdf. ActivePerl may be subject to the following copyrights: 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Guido van Rossum. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts, and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts. All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the names of Digital or MIT not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
1985, 1986, 1987, 1989, 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
End-User License Agreement

The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at: www.mentor.com/eula IMPORTANT INFORMATION USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMERS COMPLETE AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (Agreement) This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively Products) between the company acquiring the Products (Customer), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (Mentor Graphics). Except for license agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties' entire understanding relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.
1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT. 1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customers appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (Order(s)), each Order will constitute a contract between Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement, any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not these documents are referenced on the Order. Any additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order will not be effective unless agreed in writing by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics. 1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice. Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice(s). Unless timely provided with a valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax and service tax. Customer will make all payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by Customer hereunder will be Customers sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or make payments on Customers behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event of default. 1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2000), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customers provision of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address. 2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation and design data (Software) are copyrighted, trade secret and confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not expressly granted by this Agreement. Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form (except as provided in Subsection 5.2); (b) for Customers internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as the employee's residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employee's primary place of employment is the site where the Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer requests any change or enhancement to Software, whether in the course of
receiving support or consulting services, evaluating Software, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. 3. ESC SOFTWARE. If Customer purchases a license to use development or prototyping tools of Mentor Graphics Embedded Software Channel (ESC), Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to reproduce and distribute executable files created using ESC compilers, including the ESC run-time libraries distributed with ESC C and C++ compiler Software that are linked into a composite program as an integral part of Customers compiled computer program, provided that Customer distributes these files only in conjunction with Customers compiled computer program. Mentor Graphics does NOT grant Customer any right to duplicate, incorporate or embed copies of Mentor Graphics real-time operating systems or other embedded software products into Customers products or applications without first signing or otherwise agreeing to a separate agreement with Mentor Graphics for such purpose. BETA CODE. 4.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (Beta Code), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. This grant and Customers use of the Beta Code shall not be construed as marketing or offering to sell a license to the Beta Code, which Mentor Graphics may choose not to release commercially in any form. 4.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customers use of the Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customers evaluation and testing, Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and recommended improvements. 4.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on Customers feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 4.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement. 5. RESTRICTIONS ON USE. 5.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customers employees and on-site contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person permitted access does not disclose or use it except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer learns or becomes aware of such unauthorized disclosure or use. Except as otherwise permitted for purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble, reverse-compile, reverse-engineer or in any way derive any source code from Software. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software (collectively Files), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (SVRF) and Tcl Verification Format (TVF) which are Mentor Graphics proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules, constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use Software or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way competitive with Software, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark. 5.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customers employees or contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in any manner except to support this authorized use. 5.3. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense or otherwise transfer the Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (Attempted Transfer), without Mentor Graphics prior written consent and payment of Mentor Graphics then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor Graphics prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics option, result in the immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms
4.
of this Agreement, including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customers permitted successors in interest and assigns. 5.4. The provisions of this Section 5 shall survive the termination of this Agreement. 6. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer updates and technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics then current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/about/legal/. AUTOMATIC CHECK FOR UPDATES; PRIVACY. Technological measures in Software may communicate with servers of Mentor Graphics or its contractors for the purpose of checking for and notifying the user of updates and to ensure that the Software in use is licensed in compliance with this Agreement. Mentor Graphics will not collect any personally identifiable data in this process and will not disclose any data collected to any third party without the prior written consent of Customer, except to Mentor Graphics outside attorneys or as may be required by a court of competent jurisdiction. LIMITED WARRANTY. 8.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed, will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not warrant that Products will meet Customers requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a) Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification or improper installation. MENTOR GRAPHICS ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMERS EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, PROVIDED CUSTOMER HAS OTHERWISE COMPLIED WITH THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF WHICH ARE PROVIDED AS IS. 8.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 8 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. 9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT WHERE THIS EXCLUSION OR RESTRICTION OF LIABILITY WOULD BE VOID OR INEFFECTIVE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 9 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.
7.
8.
10. HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES IT IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR TESTING ITS PRODUCTS USED IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE OR INACCURACY OF ITS PRODUCTS MIGHT RESULT IN DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY (HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS). NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF MENTOR GRAPHICS PRODUCTS IN OR FOR HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 10 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. 11. INDEMNIFICATION. CUSTOMER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS FROM ANY CLAIMS, LOSS, COST, DAMAGE, EXPENSE OR LIABILITY, INCLUDING ATTORNEYS FEES, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF PRODUCTS AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 10. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 11 SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. 12. INFRINGEMENT. 12.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States, Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to the action. Customer understands and agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance
to settle or defend the action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action. 12.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 12.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense, (a) replace or modify the Product so that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use. 12.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor Graphics licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics customers; or (h) infringement by Customer that is deemed willful. In the case of (h), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs related to the action. 12.4. THIS SECTION 12 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 9 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS FOR DEFENSE, SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, AND CUSTOMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. 13. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized term. 13.1. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customers obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination. 13.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this Agreement. Upon termination, Customer shall ensure that all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in Customers possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form. 14. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and United States government agencies, which prohibit export or diversion of certain products and information about the products to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export Products in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local and United States government agencies. 15. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws. 16. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein. 17. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during Customers normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customers software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customers compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FLEXlm or FLEXnet (or successor product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics request. Customer shall make records available in electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 17 shall survive the termination of this Agreement. 18. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the United States. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of Oregon, USA, if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or South America. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin, Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all disputes in Asia arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International
Arbitration Centre (SIAC) to be conducted in the English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be incorporated by reference in this section. This section shall not restrict Mentor Graphics right to bring an action against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customers place of business is located. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement. 19. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect. 20. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements, including but not limited to any purchase order terms and conditions. Some Software may contain code distributed under a third party license agreement that may provide additional rights to Customer. Please see the applicable Software documentation for details. This Agreement may only be modified in writing by authorized representatives of the parties. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver or excuse.
Rev. 100615, Part No. 246066

Dxdesigner User

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Dxdesigner User

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

DxDesigner Users Guide

For PADS Flow Software Version PADS 9.3

2005-2011 Mentor Graphics Corporation All rights reserved.

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Figure 10-1. Netlist Workflow Dataflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Chapter 1 Introduction to DxDesigner

DxDesigner Key Features

DxDesigner Key Concepts and Tasks

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Working with DxDesigner

Working with DxDesigner

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Starting DxDesigner

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Changing DxDesigner Key Bindings and Strokes

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Changing Between Floating and Docked Window Types

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface o

Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner

Converting a Docked Window into a Floating Window

Converting a Floating Window to a Docked Window

Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region

Converting a Floating Window to a Docked Window

Converting a Docked Window into a Floating Window

Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Grouping Multiple Windows Into One Region

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Figure 1-1. Grouping Properties Window with Navigator Window

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Customizing the DxDesigner Tools Menu

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Adding a Command to the Tools Menu

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

Editing a Tools Menu Command Entry

Removing a Command From the Tools Menu

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Customizing the DxDesigner User Interface

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner

Enabling Licensed Features in DxDesigner

DxDesigner Users Guide, PADS 9.3

Introduction to DxDesigner Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands

Executing DxDesigner Command Line Commands

Designing in a Multi-User Environment